1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
73 \default_output_format pdf2
75 \bibtex_command bibtex
76 \index_command default
80 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
81 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
85 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
86 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
87 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
92 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
93 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
96 \use_package amsmath 1
97 \use_package amssymb 1
100 \use_package mathdots 1
101 \use_package mathtools 0
102 \use_package mhchem 1
103 \use_package stackrel 0
104 \use_package stmaryrd 0
105 \use_package undertilde 0
107 \cite_engine_type default
111 \paperorientation portrait
115 \notefontcolor #0000ff
132 \paragraph_separation skip
134 \quotes_style english
138 \paperpagestyle default
139 \tracking_changes true
140 \output_changes false
144 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
145 \author 274215730 "scott"
146 \author 424524441 "rgheck"
157 by the \SpecialChar LyX
162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
164 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
165 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
166 Documentation mailing list:
167 \begin_inset CommandInset href
169 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
180 \begin_inset Newline newline
184 \begin_inset Newline newline
188 \begin_inset Note Note
191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
192 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
193 \begin_inset Newline newline
198 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
199 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
207 \begin_layout Standard
208 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
209 LatexCommand tableofcontents
216 \begin_layout Chapter
220 \begin_layout Section
221 What is \SpecialChar LyX
225 \begin_layout Standard
227 is a document preparation system.
228 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
229 scripts, publishable books, business
230 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
231 It is unlike most other
232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
239 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
241 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
254 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
257 pt type, left justified, 5
258 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
267 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
271 \begin_layout Standard
272 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
277 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
281 \begin_layout Standard
286 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
287 's philosophy: most importantly,
288 the format of all of the manuals.
289 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
290 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
296 manual describes that, too.
299 \begin_layout Section
304 \begin_layout Standard
305 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
306 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
308 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
309 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
313 \begin_layout Standard
314 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
315 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
316 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
318 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
319 only a vertical scrollbar.
320 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
321 The first case is large images.
322 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
323 image and use the option
334 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
337 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
338 this doesn't work for equations yet.
341 \begin_layout Standard
342 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
343 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
351 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
358 \begin_layout Section
362 \begin_layout Standard
363 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
365 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
367 Just select the manual you want to read from the
374 \begin_layout Section
375 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
377 \begin_inset CommandInset label
379 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
386 \begin_layout Standard
387 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
388 can be configured via the menu
390 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
394 \begin_inset Index idx
397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
404 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
406 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
407 packages are available.
408 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
410 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
412 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
413 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
417 \begin_inset space \space{}
420 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
421 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
423 To force \SpecialChar LyX
424 to re-inspect your system, you should use
426 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
430 \begin_inset Index idx
433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
434 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
440 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
441 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
444 \begin_layout Section
447 \begin_inset CommandInset label
449 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
456 \begin_layout Standard
457 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
458 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
459 installed, but you will not be
460 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
461 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
462 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
463 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
464 document can always be output as plain text
468 \begin_layout Standard
469 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
470 or DocBook classes or packages.
471 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
472 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
475 \begin_layout Standard
476 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
477 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
478 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
481 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
489 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
490 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
493 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
497 \begin_inset Index idx
500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
501 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
509 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
516 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
520 \begin_layout Chapter
521 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
525 \begin_layout Section
526 Basic File Operations
527 \begin_inset Index idx
530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
539 \begin_layout Standard
544 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
545 in addition to some more advanced operations:
548 \begin_layout Itemize
570 \begin_layout Itemize
586 arg "buffer-new-template"
592 \begin_layout Itemize
614 \begin_layout Itemize
624 \begin_layout Itemize
638 \begin_layout Itemize
660 \begin_layout Itemize
672 arg "buffer-write-as"
678 \begin_layout Itemize
692 \begin_layout Itemize
706 \begin_layout Standard
707 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
708 a few minor differences.
711 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
722 command lists the available templates.
723 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
724 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
725 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
731 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
733 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
740 \begin_layout Standard
741 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
773 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
774 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
775 is just that — a big, blank space.
783 \begin_layout Standard
804 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
809 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
812 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
830 will reload the document from disk.
831 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
832 and want to restore it to the last save.
841 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
842 them as your changes.
845 \begin_layout Section
846 Basic Editing Features
847 \begin_inset Index idx
850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
857 \begin_inset CommandInset label
859 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
866 \begin_layout Standard
867 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
868 can perform cut and paste operations
869 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
870 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
871 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
872 editing features and how to access
874 We will start with cut and paste.
877 \begin_layout Standard
878 As you might expect, the
882 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
883 various other editing features.
884 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
888 \begin_layout Itemize
894 \begin_inset Index idx
897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
926 \begin_layout Itemize
932 \begin_inset Index idx
935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
964 \begin_layout Itemize
970 \begin_inset Index idx
973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
998 \begin_layout Itemize
1002 \begin_inset space ~
1008 \begin_layout Itemize
1012 \begin_inset space ~
1018 \begin_layout Itemize
1022 \begin_inset space ~
1026 \begin_inset space ~
1032 \begin_inset Index idx
1035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1044 \begin_inset Index idx
1047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1062 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1072 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1078 \begin_layout Standard
1079 The first three are self-explanatory.
1080 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1081 and other programs by
1102 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1103 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1108 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1109 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1110 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1111 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1112 into individual cells.
1116 \begin_inset space ~
1121 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1122 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1126 \begin_layout Standard
1130 \begin_inset space ~
1135 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1137 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1139 \begin_inset space ~
1146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1152 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1153 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1154 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1156 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1160 \begin_inset space \space{}
1163 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1164 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1167 \begin_inset space ~
1170 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1172 \begin_inset space ~
1176 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1180 \begin_inset space ~
1189 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1190 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1192 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1196 \begin_inset space ~
1201 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1202 start a new paragraph.
1203 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1204 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1209 \begin_inset space ~
1212 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1214 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1218 \begin_inset space ~
1226 \begin_inset space ~
1229 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1232 paste from the primary selection.
1233 This is normally the currently selected text.
1236 \begin_layout Standard
1239 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1241 \begin_inset space ~
1245 \begin_inset space ~
1253 \begin_inset space ~
1257 \begin_inset space ~
1263 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1269 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1272 \begin_inset space ~
1281 \begin_inset space ~
1286 button to skip the current word.
1290 \begin_inset space ~
1295 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1299 \begin_inset space ~
1304 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1306 If the toggle is set, searching for
1307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1318 will not match the word
1319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1333 Match whole words only
1335 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1336 to only find complete words, e.
1337 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1366 offers also an advanced
1369 \begin_inset space ~
1373 \begin_inset space ~
1378 feature that is described in section
1379 \begin_inset space ~
1383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1385 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1392 \begin_layout Standard
1393 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1394 \begin_inset space \space{}
1398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1406 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1408 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1413 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1420 \begin_layout Standard
1424 arg "inset-select-all"
1427 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1428 When the cursor is inside an inset
1431 arg "inset-select-all"
1434 selects the content of the inset.
1438 arg "inset-select-all"
1441 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1446 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1449 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1453 \begin_layout Section
1455 \begin_inset Index idx
1458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1465 \begin_inset Index idx
1468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1475 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1477 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1484 \begin_layout Standard
1485 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1487 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1490 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1493 or the toolbar button
1499 to undo some mistake.
1500 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1502 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1505 or the toolbar button
1512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1519 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1520 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1523 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1526 \begin_layout Standard
1527 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1536 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1537 This is a consequence of the 100
1538 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1541 step undo limit mentioned above.
1544 \begin_layout Standard
1553 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1555 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1559 \begin_layout Section
1561 \begin_inset Index idx
1564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1573 \begin_layout Standard
1574 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1577 \begin_layout Enumerate
1582 \begin_layout Itemize
1587 once anywhere in the edit window.
1588 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1592 \begin_layout Enumerate
1597 \begin_layout Itemize
1604 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1607 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1610 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1611 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1614 \begin_layout Itemize
1615 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1618 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1625 \begin_layout Enumerate
1626 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1630 \begin_layout Standard
1631 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1632 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1636 \begin_layout Section
1638 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1640 name "sec:Navigating"
1645 \begin_inset Index idx
1648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1657 \begin_layout Standard
1659 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1662 \begin_layout Itemize
1667 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1668 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1671 \begin_layout Itemize
1672 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1674 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1676 \begin_inset space ~
1681 or by the toolbar button
1684 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1690 \begin_layout Itemize
1691 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1693 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1696 and use the same menu to return to them.
1697 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1700 \begin_layout Standard
1704 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1709 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1710 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1712 \begin_inset space ~
1717 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1718 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1719 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1720 your last editing position.
1723 \begin_layout Standard
1728 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1732 \begin_layout Subsection
1734 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1736 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1741 \begin_inset Index idx
1744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1745 Navigating ! Outline
1751 \begin_inset Index idx
1754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1763 \begin_layout Standard
1764 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1765 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1766 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1768 \begin_inset space ~
1772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1774 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1778 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1779 \begin_inset space ~
1783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1785 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1790 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1794 \begin_layout Standard
1795 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1796 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1797 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1798 dialog and to modify the citation.
1801 \begin_layout Standard
1802 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1804 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1805 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1813 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1816 \begin_layout Standard
1817 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1818 you further to control the display.
1823 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1824 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1830 option keeps it in the current view state.
1831 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1832 \begin_inset space ~
1835 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1836 \begin_inset space ~
1839 3, the subsections of sections
1840 \begin_inset space ~
1843 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1848 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1849 \begin_inset space ~
1853 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1863 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1866 \begin_layout Standard
1873 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1874 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1888 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1889 So, for example, you can move section
1890 \begin_inset space ~
1894 \begin_inset space ~
1897 2.4 or after section
1898 \begin_inset space ~
1903 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1916 (or the corresponding key bindings
1924 ) you can change the level of sections.
1925 So you can for example make section
1926 \begin_inset space ~
1930 \begin_inset space ~
1934 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \begin_layout Standard
1941 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1942 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1945 \begin_layout Subsection
1946 Horizontal Scrolling
1947 \begin_inset Index idx
1950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1951 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1959 \begin_layout Standard
1961 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1963 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1967 \begin_inset space \space{}
1971 \begin_inset space ~
1974 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1975 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1976 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1980 \begin_layout Standard
1981 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1985 \begin_layout Itemize
1987 is used on a small tablet computer
1990 \begin_layout Itemize
1991 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
1995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2003 \begin_inset space ~
2016 \begin_layout Itemize
2017 Math constructs with long command names
2020 \begin_layout Standard
2021 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2022 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2024 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2025 windows so that table
2026 \begin_inset space ~
2030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2032 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2037 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2039 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2040 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2043 \begin_layout Standard
2044 \begin_inset Float table
2050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2051 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2054 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2056 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2060 Horizontal scrolling test.
2068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2070 \begin_inset Tabular
2071 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2072 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2073 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2074 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2075 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2117 \begin_layout Section
2118 Input/Word Completion
2119 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2121 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2126 \begin_inset Index idx
2129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2136 \begin_inset Index idx
2139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2170 \begin_layout Standard
2172 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2174 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2175 is used to propose completions.
2178 \begin_layout Standard
2179 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2182 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2187 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2194 \begin_inset space ~
2198 \begin_inset space ~
2203 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2207 \begin_inset space ~
2212 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2213 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2217 \begin_inset space ~
2223 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2224 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2225 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2226 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2229 \begin_layout Standard
2231 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2232 completions available.
2237 key to accept a proposed completion.
2238 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2239 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2240 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2247 \begin_layout Standard
2248 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2249 ing options for text.
2250 The special math option
2254 enables characters to be composed.
2255 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2256 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2259 , you can then input the characters
2260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2271 to a formula to get it.
2272 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2273 of the math toolbar.
2274 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2278 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2279 's installation folder.
2280 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2289 \begin_layout Section
2291 \begin_inset Index idx
2294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2301 \begin_inset Index idx
2304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2333 \begin_inset Index idx
2336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2367 \begin_layout Standard
2368 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2382 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2385 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2389 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2390 \begin_inset space ~
2394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2396 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2403 \begin_layout Standard
2407 \begin_inset space ~
2415 \begin_inset space ~
2436 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2440 \begin_layout Labeling
2441 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2445 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2446 LatexCommand nomenclature
2448 description "Tabulator key"
2454 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2456 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2457 \begin_inset space ~
2461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2463 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2470 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2474 , especially section
2475 \begin_inset space ~
2479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2481 reference "subsec:Lists"
2487 If you are still confused, look in the
2492 \begin_inset Newline newline
2500 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2501 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2505 \begin_layout Labeling
2506 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2510 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2511 LatexCommand nomenclature
2513 description "Escape key"
2520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2527 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2528 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2531 \begin_layout Labeling
2532 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2538 \begin_inset space ~
2542 \begin_inset space ~
2549 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2550 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2554 \begin_layout Standard
2555 There are three modifier keys:
2558 \begin_layout Labeling
2559 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2577 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2578 LatexCommand nomenclature
2580 description "Control key"
2584 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2585 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2589 \begin_layout Itemize
2598 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2601 \begin_layout Itemize
2610 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2613 \begin_layout Itemize
2622 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2626 \begin_layout Labeling
2627 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2645 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2646 LatexCommand nomenclature
2648 description "Shift key"
2652 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2653 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2656 \begin_layout Labeling
2657 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2675 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2676 LatexCommand nomenclature
2678 description "Alt or Meta key"
2682 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2683 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2684 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2690 \begin_inset Newline newline
2693 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2695 menu accelerator keys
2698 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2699 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2703 \begin_layout Standard
2704 For example, the sequence
2705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2711 \begin_inset space ~
2715 \begin_inset space ~
2721 \begin_inset space ~
2729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2748 \begin_inset space ~
2754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2764 \begin_layout Standard
2769 manual lists all other things bound to the
2777 \begin_layout Standard
2778 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2780 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2781 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2782 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2783 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2784 The \SpecialChar LyX
2785 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2786 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2787 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2789 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2805 followed by a capital
2812 \begin_layout Chapter
2815 \begin_inset Index idx
2818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2828 \begin_layout Section
2830 \begin_inset Index idx
2833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2842 \begin_layout Subsection
2846 \begin_layout Standard
2847 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2848 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2849 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2850 numbering schemes, and so on.
2851 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2852 and format the title of your document differently.
2855 \begin_layout Standard
2860 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2861 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2862 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2863 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2864 picks one for you by default.
2865 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2868 \begin_layout Subsection
2870 \begin_inset Index idx
2873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2882 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2889 \begin_layout Standard
2890 You can select a class using the
2892 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2893 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2897 \begin_inset Index idx
2900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2907 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2911 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2915 \begin_layout Standard
2916 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2921 \begin_layout Description
2922 Article for basic articles
2925 \begin_layout Description
2926 Report for basic reports
2929 \begin_layout Description
2930 Book for writing a book
2933 \begin_layout Description
2934 Letter for US-style letters
2937 \begin_layout Standard
2938 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2939 only uses if you have installed
2940 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2941 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2942 distributions will include
2944 Here are some of the classes.
2945 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2947 Special Document Classes
2956 \begin_layout Description
2957 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2960 \begin_layout Description
2961 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2965 \begin_layout Description
2966 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2970 \begin_layout Description
2971 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2972 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2973 There are three article layouts available.
2974 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2975 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2976 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2977 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2982 sequential numbering
2983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2986 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2987 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2988 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2989 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2992 \begin_layout Description
2993 Beamer Layout for presentations
2996 \begin_layout Description
2997 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2998 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2999 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3000 with \SpecialChar LyX
3004 \begin_layout Description
3005 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3008 \begin_layout Description
3010 \begin_inset space ~
3013 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3016 \begin_layout Description
3017 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3020 \begin_layout Description
3021 Foils Used to make transparencies
3024 \begin_layout Description
3025 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3026 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3027 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3028 with \SpecialChar LyX
3032 \begin_layout Description
3033 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3034 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3037 \begin_layout Description
3038 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3041 \begin_layout Description
3042 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3045 \begin_layout Description
3046 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3047 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3048 (Is used by this document.)
3051 \begin_layout Description
3052 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3055 \begin_layout Description
3056 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3059 \begin_layout Description
3064 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3065 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3067 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3071 \begin_layout Description
3072 Slides Used to make transparencies
3075 \begin_layout Description
3077 \begin_inset space ~
3080 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3081 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3084 \begin_layout Description
3085 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3088 \begin_layout Standard
3089 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3091 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3093 Special Document Classes
3100 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3101 of the document classes.
3104 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3108 \begin_layout Standard
3109 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3111 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3112 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3114 \begin_inset Index idx
3117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3134 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3135 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3137 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3140 \begin_layout Standard
3143 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3148 , are highly specialized.
3150 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3151 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3152 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3153 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3154 by some document class.
3155 There are just too many of them.
3156 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3159 \begin_layout Standard
3160 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3168 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3169 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3170 document class for a new file.
3172 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3175 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3182 manual for information on how to install them.
3183 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3189 \begin_layout Standard
3190 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3191 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3192 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3193 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3194 class files to be used for dissertation
3195 s submitted to those universities.
3196 The \SpecialChar LyX
3197 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3199 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3203 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3209 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3212 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3214 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3216 name "subsec:Modules"
3221 \begin_inset Index idx
3224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3233 \begin_layout Standard
3234 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3235 chosen document class.
3236 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3237 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3244 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3248 \begin_inset Index idx
3251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3258 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3262 \begin_layout Standard
3263 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3264 packages or file format converters that are not always
3265 installed by default.
3267 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3268 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3269 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3270 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3272 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3273 file without the missing prerequisites.
3274 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3275 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3278 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3282 \begin_inset Index idx
3285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3286 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3292 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3297 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3300 \begin_layout Standard
3301 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3309 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3311 will advise you about these things.
3319 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3321 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3323 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3328 \begin_inset Index idx
3331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3332 Document ! Local Layout
3340 \begin_layout Standard
3341 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3342 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3343 : They are intended to be used in
3344 a variety of different documents.
3345 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3346 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3347 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3348 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3349 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3351 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3369 manual for information on how to use it.
3372 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3376 \begin_layout Standard
3377 Each class has a default set of options.
3378 Here's a quick table describing them:
3381 \begin_layout Standard
3382 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3388 \begin_layout Standard
3390 \begin_inset Tabular
3391 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3392 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3393 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3394 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3395 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3396 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3397 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3851 \begin_layout Standard
3852 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3858 \begin_layout Standard
3859 You're probably also wondering what
3860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3864 \begin_inset space ~
3868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3872 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3873 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3878 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3883 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3893 headings, there are also
3901 headings, and so on.
3902 We will describe these headings fully in section
3903 \begin_inset space ~
3907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3909 reference "subsec:Headings"
3916 \begin_layout Subsection
3918 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3920 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3925 \begin_inset Index idx
3928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3935 \begin_inset Index idx
3938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3947 \begin_layout Standard
3948 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3950 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3957 \begin_inset space ~
3965 \begin_inset space ~
3970 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3972 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3973 doesn't support special options you want to
3974 use for your document.
3975 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3976 -class and its options, you have to read
3980 \begin_layout Standard
3984 \begin_inset space ~
3991 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3997 \begin_inset space ~
4002 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4003 You can choose between the following five options:
4006 \begin_layout Labeling
4007 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4012 Use default page style of current class.
4015 \begin_layout Labeling
4016 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4021 No page numbers or headings.
4024 \begin_layout Labeling
4025 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4033 \begin_layout Labeling
4034 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4039 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4040 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4041 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4042 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4045 \begin_layout Labeling
4046 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4051 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4052 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4058 \begin_inset Index idx
4061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4063 -packages ! fancyhdr
4069 How they are defined is explained in section
4070 \begin_inset space ~
4074 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4076 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4083 \begin_layout Standard
4084 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4085 \begin_inset space ~
4089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4091 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4098 \begin_layout Subsection
4099 Paper Size and Orientation
4100 \begin_inset Index idx
4103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4104 Document ! Paper size
4110 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4112 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4119 \begin_layout Standard
4120 You can find the following options in the menu
4123 \begin_inset space ~
4130 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4134 \begin_inset Index idx
4137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4146 \begin_layout Labeling
4147 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4151 \begin_inset space ~
4156 What size paper to print on.
4161 \begin_layout Itemize
4167 \begin_layout Itemize
4173 \begin_layout Itemize
4179 \begin_layout Itemize
4185 \begin_layout Itemize
4188 US letter, US legal, US executive
4191 \begin_layout Itemize
4197 \begin_layout Itemize
4204 \begin_layout Labeling
4205 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4210 To choose whether to output as
4221 \begin_layout Labeling
4222 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4226 \begin_inset space ~
4231 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4232 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4235 \begin_layout Subsection
4237 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4239 name "subsec:Margins"
4244 \begin_inset Index idx
4247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4254 \begin_inset Index idx
4257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4266 \begin_layout Standard
4267 Paper margins are set in the menu
4269 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4273 \begin_inset Index idx
4276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4285 \begin_layout Standard
4286 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4287 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4288 the paper format and the font size into account.
4291 \begin_layout Subsection
4295 \begin_layout Standard
4296 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4302 That includes the paragraph environments.
4303 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4304 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4305 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4307 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4316 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4318 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4319 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4320 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4323 \begin_layout Section
4324 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4325 \begin_inset Index idx
4328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4329 Paragraph ! Indentation
4337 \begin_layout Subsection
4339 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4341 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4348 \begin_layout Standard
4349 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4350 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4353 \begin_layout Standard
4354 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4355 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4356 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4357 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4361 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4367 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4368 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4369 language than English.
4371 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4374 \begin_layout Standard
4375 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4376 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4377 into \SpecialChar LyX
4379 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4382 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4384 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4385 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4386 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4393 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4394 goes to produce a printable file.
4399 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4401 gives you the ability globally to change
4405 these pre-coded spacings.
4406 We will explain more later.
4409 \begin_layout Subsection
4410 Paragraph Separation
4411 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4413 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4418 \begin_inset Index idx
4421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4422 Paragraph ! Separation
4430 \begin_layout Standard
4438 \begin_inset space ~
4446 \begin_inset space ~
4453 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4457 \begin_inset Index idx
4460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4466 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4469 \begin_layout Subsection
4473 \begin_layout Standard
4474 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4477 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4479 \begin_inset space ~
4484 dialog and toggle the
4487 \begin_inset space ~
4492 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4495 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4499 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4500 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4504 \begin_layout Standard
4505 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4506 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4509 \begin_layout Subsection
4511 \begin_inset Index idx
4514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4515 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4523 \begin_layout Standard
4526 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4530 \begin_inset Index idx
4533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4542 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4546 \begin_inset space ~
4555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4556 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4562 \begin_inset Index idx
4565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4567 -packages ! setspace
4572 installed to use this feature.
4577 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4579 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4581 \begin_inset space ~
4586 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4587 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4590 \begin_layout Section
4591 Paragraph Environments
4592 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4594 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4599 \begin_inset Index idx
4602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4603 Paragraph ! Environments
4609 \begin_inset Index idx
4612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4613 Paragraph environments|(
4621 \begin_layout Subsection
4625 \begin_layout Standard
4626 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4629 \begin_layout Standard
4638 } \SpecialChar ldots
4648 \begin_inset Newline newline
4651 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4653 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4654 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4655 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4664 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4667 \begin_layout Standard
4668 A paragraph environment is simply a
4669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4676 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4677 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4678 scheme, labels, and so on.
4679 Additionally, you can
4680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4687 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4688 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4689 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4690 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4692 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4694 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4697 \begin_layout Standard
4698 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4699 \begin_inset Graphics
4700 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4706 at the left end of the toolbar.
4708 will change the environment of the
4712 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4713 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4714 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4718 \begin_layout Standard
4727 create a new paragraph using the
4731 paragraph environment.
4733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4740 because if you are in one of these environments:
4743 \begin_layout Itemize
4749 \begin_layout Itemize
4755 \begin_layout Itemize
4761 \begin_layout Itemize
4767 \begin_layout Itemize
4773 \begin_layout Itemize
4779 \begin_layout Itemize
4785 \begin_layout Standard
4787 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4791 , rather than resetting it to
4796 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4797 \begin_inset space ~
4801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4803 reference "sec:Nesting"
4810 \begin_layout Subsection
4814 \begin_layout Standard
4815 The default paragraph environment is
4820 It creates a plain paragraph.
4822 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4823 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4824 this manual) are in the
4831 \begin_layout Standard
4832 You can nest a paragraph using the
4836 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4844 \begin_layout Subsection
4846 \begin_inset Index idx
4849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4858 \begin_layout Standard
4859 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4860 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4869 for thanks or contact information.
4870 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4871 places all of this on a separate page
4872 along with today's date.
4873 For other types of documents, the title
4874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4881 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4885 \begin_layout Standard
4887 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4901 Here's how you use them:
4904 \begin_layout Itemize
4905 Put the title of your document in the
4912 \begin_layout Itemize
4913 Put the author name in the
4920 \begin_layout Itemize
4921 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4922 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4928 Note that using this environment is optional.
4929 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4930 will automatically insert today's date.
4931 If you don't want a date, use the option
4933 Suppress default date on front page
4937 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4938 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4940 \begin_inset space ~
4948 \begin_layout Standard
4949 You can use footnotes to insert
4950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4957 or contact information.
4960 \begin_layout Subsection
4962 \begin_inset Index idx
4965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4972 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4974 name "subsec:Headings"
4981 \begin_layout Standard
4982 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4984 takes care of the numbering for you.
4987 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4989 \begin_inset Index idx
4992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4993 Section headings ! Numbered
5001 \begin_layout Standard
5002 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5006 \begin_layout Enumerate
5012 \begin_layout Enumerate
5018 \begin_layout Enumerate
5024 \begin_layout Enumerate
5030 \begin_layout Enumerate
5036 \begin_layout Enumerate
5042 \begin_layout Enumerate
5048 \begin_layout Standard
5050 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5051 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5052 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5055 \begin_layout Standard
5056 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5057 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5058 You group the book into chapters.
5060 does a similar grouping:
5063 \begin_layout Itemize
5068 is divided into either
5079 \begin_layout Itemize
5091 \begin_layout Itemize
5103 \begin_layout Itemize
5115 \begin_layout Itemize
5127 \begin_layout Itemize
5139 \begin_layout Standard
5140 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5148 Not all document types use the
5152 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5157 is the top-level heading.
5165 \begin_layout Standard
5170 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5171 labels it with its number,
5172 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5174 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5186 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5188 \begin_inset Index idx
5191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5192 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5200 \begin_layout Standard
5201 The unnumbered section headings have a
5202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5209 at the end of their name.
5210 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5211 the table of contents, see section
5212 \begin_inset space ~
5216 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5225 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5226 Changing the Numbering
5227 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5229 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5236 \begin_layout Standard
5237 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5238 in the Table of Contents.
5239 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5241 Just as certain classes start with
5255 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5265 This is something you can change.
5268 \begin_layout Standard
5271 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5275 \begin_inset Index idx
5278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5287 \begin_inset space ~
5291 \begin_inset space ~
5296 you will see two counters.
5301 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5302 numbers a section heading.
5303 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5307 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5308 Short Titles of Headings
5309 \begin_inset Index idx
5312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5313 Section headings ! Short titles
5319 \begin_inset Argument 1
5322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5329 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5331 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5338 \begin_layout Standard
5339 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5340 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5341 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5342 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5345 \begin_layout Standard
5347 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5348 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5349 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5350 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5353 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5355 \begin_inset space ~
5361 This will insert a box labeled
5362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5366 \begin_inset space ~
5370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5373 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5374 This also works for captions inside floats.
5375 There can only be one short title per title.
5378 \begin_layout Standard
5379 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5382 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5386 \begin_layout Standard
5387 The following information applies to all section headings:
5390 \begin_layout Itemize
5391 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5394 \begin_layout Itemize
5395 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5398 \begin_layout Itemize
5399 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5402 \begin_layout Itemize
5403 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5406 \begin_layout Subsection
5410 \begin_layout Standard
5412 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5426 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5427 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5428 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5429 the text they contain.
5430 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5438 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5441 \begin_layout Standard
5442 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5451 when you start a new paragraph.
5452 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5456 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5457 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5458 have to change back to the
5462 environment yourself.
5465 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5467 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5474 \begin_inset Index idx
5477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5486 \begin_layout Standard
5487 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5488 time for the differences.
5497 are identical except for one difference:
5501 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5510 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5513 \begin_layout Standard
5514 Here's an example of the
5527 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5529 See – no indentation!
5533 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5534 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5535 the other paragraph.
5538 \begin_layout Standard
5539 Here's another example, this time in the
5546 \begin_layout Quotation
5552 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5553 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5554 the first line, then
5558 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5562 you were quoting other text.
5565 \begin_layout Quotation
5566 Here's a new paragraph.
5567 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5568 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5571 \begin_layout Standard
5572 As the examples show,
5576 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5577 They should put quotes in the
5582 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5586 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5589 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5591 \begin_inset Index idx
5594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5601 \begin_inset Index idx
5604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5611 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5620 \begin_layout Standard
5625 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5631 \begin_inset Newline newline
5634 Which I did not rehearse!
5638 It could be much worse.
5639 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5641 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5642 indented a bit more than the first.
5643 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5649 \begin_inset Newline newline
5652 And make things look fine
5653 \begin_inset Newline newline
5659 arg "newline-insert newline"
5665 \begin_layout Standard
5670 does not indent both margins.
5671 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5672 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5675 arg "newline-insert newline"
5681 \begin_layout Subsection
5683 \begin_inset Index idx
5686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5693 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5702 \begin_layout Standard
5704 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5714 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5715 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5724 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5725 lets you provide your own label.
5726 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5727 describing some general features of all four of them.
5730 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5734 \begin_layout Standard
5735 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5737 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5738 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5747 reset the environment to
5751 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5752 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5753 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5757 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5761 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5768 \begin_layout Standard
5769 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5770 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5771 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5773 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5774 you read all of section
5775 \begin_inset space ~
5779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5781 reference "sec:Nesting"
5788 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5790 \begin_inset Index idx
5793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5800 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5809 \begin_layout Standard
5810 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5814 paragraph environment.
5815 It has the following properties:
5818 \begin_layout Itemize
5819 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5823 \begin_layout Itemize
5825 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5828 \begin_layout Itemize
5829 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5833 \begin_layout Itemize
5834 The items can have any length.
5836 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5837 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5844 \begin_layout Itemize
5849 environment inside another
5853 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5857 \begin_layout Itemize
5858 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5861 \begin_layout Itemize
5863 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5866 \begin_layout Itemize
5868 \begin_inset space ~
5872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5874 reference "sec:Nesting"
5878 for a full explanation of nesting.
5882 \begin_layout Standard
5883 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5892 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5895 \begin_layout Standard
5896 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5897 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5900 \begin_layout Itemize
5901 The label for the first level
5905 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5909 \begin_layout Itemize
5910 The label for the second level is a dash.
5914 \begin_layout Itemize
5915 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5919 \begin_layout Itemize
5920 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5924 \begin_layout Itemize
5925 Back out to the third level.
5929 \begin_layout Itemize
5930 Back to the second level.
5934 \begin_layout Itemize
5935 Back to the outermost level.
5938 \begin_layout Standard
5939 These are the default labels for an
5944 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5946 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5949 dialog in the submenu
5954 \begin_inset Index idx
5957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5963 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5967 \begin_layout Standard
5968 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5969 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5971 \begin_inset space ~
5975 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5977 reference "sec:Nesting"
5984 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5986 \begin_inset Index idx
5989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5996 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5998 name "sec:Enumerate"
6005 \begin_layout Standard
6010 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6011 It has these properties:
6014 \begin_layout Enumerate
6015 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6019 \begin_layout Enumerate
6020 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6024 \begin_layout Enumerate
6026 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6029 \begin_layout Enumerate
6034 environment resets the counter to one.
6037 \begin_layout Enumerate
6050 \begin_layout Enumerate
6051 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6052 Items can have any length.
6055 \begin_layout Enumerate
6056 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6059 \begin_layout Enumerate
6060 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6063 \begin_layout Enumerate
6064 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6068 \begin_layout Standard
6077 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6079 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6080 labels the four different levels in an
6087 \begin_layout Enumerate
6088 The first level of an
6092 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6096 \begin_layout Enumerate
6097 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6101 \begin_layout Enumerate
6102 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6106 \begin_layout Enumerate
6107 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6110 \begin_layout Enumerate
6111 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6116 \begin_layout Enumerate
6117 Back to the third level
6121 \begin_layout Enumerate
6122 Back to the second level.
6126 \begin_layout Enumerate
6127 Back to the outermost level.
6130 \begin_layout Standard
6131 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6135 environment, see section
6136 \begin_inset space ~
6140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6142 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6147 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6151 \begin_layout Standard
6152 There is more to nesting
6156 environments than we've stated here.
6157 You should read section
6158 \begin_inset space ~
6162 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6164 reference "sec:Nesting"
6168 to learn more about nesting.
6171 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6173 \begin_inset Index idx
6176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6185 \begin_layout Standard
6186 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6190 list has no fixed label.
6191 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6200 of the first line as the label.
6204 \begin_layout Description
6205 Example: This is an example of the
6212 \begin_layout Standard
6214 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6218 \begin_layout Standard
6220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6227 it is meant that the first usage of the
6231 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6233 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6241 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6246 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6247 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6249 \begin_inset space ~
6255 \begin_inset space ~
6259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6261 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6265 for more information.) Here is an example:
6268 \begin_layout Description
6270 \begin_inset space ~
6273 Example: This one shows how to use a
6276 \begin_inset space ~
6288 \begin_layout Description
6289 Usage: You should use the
6293 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6294 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6296 It's not a good idea to use a
6300 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6301 You're better off using
6313 paragraphs into them.
6316 \begin_layout Description
6317 Nesting: You can nest
6321 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6325 \begin_layout Standard
6326 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6327 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6328 them from the first line.
6331 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6333 \begin_inset Index idx
6336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6345 \begin_layout Standard
6350 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6351 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6355 \begin_layout Standard
6364 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6366 Here are its properties:
6369 \begin_layout Labeling
6370 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6372 \begin_inset space ~
6375 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6384 of each line as the item label.
6389 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6390 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6391 space as described above.
6394 \begin_layout Labeling
6395 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6396 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6397 uses different margins for the item label and the
6398 body of the item text.
6399 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6400 label width plus a little extra space.
6404 \begin_layout Labeling
6405 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6407 \begin_inset space ~
6410 width \SpecialChar LyX
6411 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6412 If the label width is larger, the label
6413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6420 into the first line.
6421 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6422 margin of the rest of the item text.
6425 \begin_layout Labeling
6426 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6428 \begin_inset space ~
6431 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6436 environment has the same left margin.
6437 \begin_inset Newline newline
6440 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6443 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6445 \begin_inset space ~
6450 dialog (toolbar button
6453 arg "layout-paragraph"
6460 \begin_inset space ~
6465 determines the default label width.
6466 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6475 multiple times instead.
6476 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6486 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6489 \begin_inset space ~
6494 every time you alter a label in a
6499 \begin_inset Newline newline
6502 The predefined default width is the length of
6503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6511 \begin_inset space ~
6517 \begin_layout Standard
6522 list the same way as the
6526 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6532 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6536 \begin_layout Standard
6541 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6542 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6544 \begin_inset space ~
6548 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6550 reference "sec:Nesting"
6554 to learn about nesting.
6557 \begin_layout Standard
6558 There is yet another feature of the
6562 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6563 left-justifies the item labels by
6565 You can use additional
6569 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6570 justifies the item label.
6575 are documented in section
6576 \begin_inset space ~
6580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6582 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6587 Here are some examples:
6590 \begin_layout Labeling
6591 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6592 Left The default for
6599 \begin_layout Labeling
6600 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6601 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6608 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6611 \begin_layout Labeling
6612 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6613 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6617 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6624 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6627 \begin_layout Subsection
6629 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6631 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6636 \begin_inset Index idx
6639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6648 \begin_layout Standard
6649 The features described in this section require that the module
6651 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6653 is loaded in the document settings.
6654 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6660 \begin_inset Index idx
6663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6665 -packages ! enumitem
6673 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6674 Custom Enumerate Lists
6675 \begin_inset Index idx
6678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6679 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6687 \begin_layout Standard
6689 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6692 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6695 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6696 There you add the command
6699 \begin_layout Standard
6707 \begin_layout Standard
6719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6720 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6721 Code, look at section
6722 \begin_inset space ~
6726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6728 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6741 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6748 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6749 For capital Roman numerals replace
6761 in the command above.
6762 For Arabic numerals use
6770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6777 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6792 \begin_layout Standard
6794 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6802 You can only number 26
6803 \begin_inset space ~
6806 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6814 \begin_layout Standard
6815 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6816 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6819 \begin_layout Standard
6820 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6823 \begin_layout Enumerate
6824 \begin_inset Argument 1
6827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6853 \begin_layout Enumerate
6854 \begin_inset Argument 1
6857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6880 \begin_layout Enumerate
6885 \begin_layout Enumerate
6886 \begin_inset Argument 1
6889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6913 \begin_layout Enumerate
6914 \begin_inset Argument 1
6917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6943 \begin_layout Standard
6944 For this list these commands were used:
6947 \begin_layout Standard
6958 \begin_inset Newline newline
6966 \begin_inset Newline newline
6974 \begin_inset Newline newline
6984 \begin_layout Standard
6991 makes the label emphasized and
7000 \begin_layout Standard
7001 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7009 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7010 lists until you change the definition.
7018 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7020 \begin_inset Index idx
7023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7024 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7032 \begin_layout Standard
7033 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7036 \begin_layout Enumerate
7037 \begin_inset Argument 1
7040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7059 \begin_inset Note Note
7062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7063 goes back to default numbering
7071 \begin_layout Enumerate
7075 \begin_layout Standard
7079 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7083 \begin_layout Standard
7084 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7089 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7090 to indicate that it is a resumed
7091 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7092 , but in the output.
7095 \begin_layout Standard
7096 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7104 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7113 \begin_layout Standard
7114 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7116 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7117 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7118 of a normal enumeration.
7119 There, insert the command
7122 \begin_layout Standard
7128 \begin_layout Standard
7133 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7137 \begin_layout Enumerate
7141 \begin_layout Enumerate
7145 \begin_layout Standard
7146 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7149 \begin_layout Enumerate
7150 \begin_inset Argument 1
7153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7169 This enumeration starts at 4
7172 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7174 \begin_inset Index idx
7177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7186 \begin_layout Standard
7187 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7189 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7192 \begin_layout Itemize
7196 \begin_layout Itemize
7197 with standard spacing
7200 \begin_layout Standard
7201 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7203 Add there the command
7207 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7210 \begin_layout Itemize
7211 \begin_inset Argument 1
7214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7233 \begin_layout Itemize
7237 \begin_layout Itemize
7241 \begin_layout Standard
7242 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7249 \begin_inset Index idx
7252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7254 -packages ! enumitem
7260 For more information see its documentation,
7261 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7270 \begin_layout Standard
7271 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7273 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7274 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7275 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7278 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7281 \begin_layout Enumerate
7282 \begin_inset Argument 1
7285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7293 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7306 \begin_layout Enumerate
7307 with negative indentation
7310 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7311 Further Customization
7312 \begin_inset Index idx
7315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7316 Lists ! Customization
7324 \begin_layout Standard
7325 You can also change the style of description lists.
7329 \begin_layout Standard
7335 \begin_layout Standard
7336 changes the description label font, the command
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7345 \begin_layout Standard
7346 sets the list style.
7349 \begin_layout Standard
7350 An example where the command
7353 \begin_layout Standard
7358 itshape, style=nextline
7361 \begin_layout Standard
7365 \begin_layout Description
7367 \begin_inset space ~
7371 \begin_inset Argument 1
7374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7380 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7382 itshape, style=nextline
7392 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7393 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7397 \begin_layout Description
7399 \begin_inset space ~
7402 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7403 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7404 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7407 \begin_layout Standard
7408 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7414 \begin_inset Index idx
7417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7419 -packages ! enumitem
7425 For more information see its documentation
7426 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7435 \begin_layout Subsection
7437 \begin_inset Index idx
7440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7449 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7451 \begin_inset space ~
7454 Address: An Overview
7457 \begin_layout Standard
7458 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7459 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7467 \begin_inset space ~
7473 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7474 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7475 gags on the document.
7476 In contrast, you can use the
7483 \begin_inset space ~
7488 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7489 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7493 \begin_layout Standard
7494 Of course, you're not limited to using
7501 \begin_inset space ~
7510 \begin_inset space ~
7515 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7516 some European academic papers.
7519 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7521 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7523 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7530 \begin_layout Standard
7535 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7536 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7540 \begin_inset space ~
7545 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7546 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7547 Here's an example of each:
7550 \begin_layout Right Address
7552 \begin_inset Newline newline
7556 \begin_inset Newline newline
7560 \begin_inset Newline newline
7563 When is it? What is today?
7566 \begin_layout Standard
7570 \begin_inset space ~
7576 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7578 the largest block of text on a single line.
7579 Here's an example of the
7586 \begin_layout Address
7588 \begin_inset Newline newline
7591 Where do I send this
7592 \begin_inset Newline newline
7595 Your post office and country
7598 \begin_layout Standard
7599 As you can see, both
7606 \begin_inset space ~
7611 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7616 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7617 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7623 This makes sense, since
7631 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7632 Thus, you have to use
7639 arg "newline-insert newline"
7644 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7645 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7647 \begin_inset space ~
7651 \begin_inset space ~
7656 ) to start a new line in an
7663 \begin_inset space ~
7671 \begin_layout Subsection
7675 \begin_layout Standard
7676 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7677 or list of references.
7679 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7682 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7684 \begin_inset Index idx
7687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7696 \begin_layout Standard
7701 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7702 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7703 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7704 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7718 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7719 The book document classes ignores the
7723 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7727 in a letter document class.
7730 \begin_layout Standard
7735 environment does several things for you.
7736 First, it puts the centered label
7737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7745 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7747 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7748 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7749 the subsequent text.
7750 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7752 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7756 \begin_layout Standard
7757 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7761 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7762 The new paragraph will still be in the
7767 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7768 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7771 \begin_layout Standard
7772 \begin_inset Float figure
7777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7779 \begin_inset Graphics
7780 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7788 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7791 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7793 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7814 \begin_layout Standard
7815 We would love to demonstrate the
7819 environment, but since this document is in the
7820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7827 class, we can't do this.
7828 We inserted it therefore as figure
7829 \begin_inset space ~
7833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7835 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7840 If you have never heard of an
7841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7848 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7851 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7853 \begin_inset Index idx
7856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7865 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7872 \begin_layout Standard
7877 environment is used to list references.
7878 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7879 only use it at the end of the document.
7891 \begin_layout Standard
7892 When you first open a
7896 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7897 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7913 depending on the document class.
7914 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7915 Each paragraph of the
7919 environment is a bibliography entry.
7924 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7925 Each new paragraph is still in the
7932 \begin_layout Standard
7933 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7934 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7936 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7938 handling, have a look at section
7939 \begin_inset space ~
7943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7945 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7952 \begin_layout Subsection
7953 Special Environments
7956 \begin_layout Standard
7958 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7959 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7962 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7967 \begin_inset Index idx
7970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7978 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7980 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7987 \begin_layout Standard
7993 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7995 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8000 key as a fixed whitespace.
8004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8017 \begin_inset space ~
8022 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8040 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8043 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8046 arg "newline-insert newline"
8063 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8064 So, when you finish using the
8069 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8070 Also, you can nest the
8075 environment inside of others.
8078 \begin_layout Standard
8079 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8082 \begin_layout Itemize
8086 arg "newline-insert newline"
8089 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8090 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8094 \begin_inset space \space{}
8104 arg "newline-insert newline"
8110 \begin_layout Itemize
8114 arg "newline-insert newline"
8124 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8130 \begin_layout Itemize
8131 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8132 You must put at least one
8136 in any line you want blank.
8137 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8141 \begin_layout Itemize
8142 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8146 since that will insert
8151 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8154 arg "self-insert \""
8160 \begin_layout Standard
8164 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8168 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8172 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8176 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8180 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8181 printf("Hello World!
8186 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8190 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8194 \begin_layout Standard
8195 This is just the standard
8196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8207 \begin_layout Standard
8213 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8215 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8216 as if you used a typewriter.
8217 \begin_inset Index idx
8220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8221 Paragraph environments|)
8226 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8229 Program Code Listings
8234 \begin_inset space ~
8242 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8246 \begin_inset Index idx
8249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8258 \begin_layout Standard
8263 environment is similar to the
8268 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8269 computer console text.
8274 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8288 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8289 you can have empty lines.
8302 \begin_layout Itemize
8303 have a certain language and a text style
8306 \begin_layout Itemize
8307 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8308 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8309 and \SpecialChar TeX
8313 \begin_layout Standard
8314 Because of these properties
8318 works like a typewriter.
8322 \begin_layout Verbatim
8327 \begin_layout Verbatim
8331 The following 2 lines are empty:
8334 \begin_layout Verbatim
8338 \begin_layout Verbatim
8342 \begin_layout Verbatim
8344 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8349 \begin_layout Standard
8354 environment is identical to
8358 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8359 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8366 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8371 \begin_layout Section
8372 Nesting Environments
8373 \begin_inset Index idx
8376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8377 Nesting ! Environments
8383 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8392 \begin_layout Subsection
8396 \begin_layout Standard
8398 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8400 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8402 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8404 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8416 \begin_layout Enumerate
8420 \begin_layout Enumerate
8425 \begin_layout Enumerate
8429 \begin_layout Enumerate
8434 \begin_layout Enumerate
8438 \begin_layout Standard
8439 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8440 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8442 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8444 \begin_inset space ~
8448 \begin_inset space ~
8456 \begin_inset space ~
8460 \begin_inset space ~
8465 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8467 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8470 arg "depth-increment"
8476 arg "depth-decrement"
8490 arg "depth-increment"
8496 arg "depth-decrement"
8500 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8501 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8505 \begin_layout Standard
8506 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8507 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8508 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8509 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8510 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8513 \begin_layout Standard
8514 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8516 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8518 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8521 \begin_layout Subsection
8522 What You Can and Can't Nest
8525 \begin_layout Standard
8526 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8527 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8530 \begin_layout Standard
8531 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8532 than a simple yes or no.
8533 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8536 \begin_layout Itemize
8537 Completely unnestable
8540 \begin_layout Itemize
8541 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8545 \begin_layout Itemize
8546 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8550 \begin_layout Standard
8551 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8552 environments have them:
8555 \begin_layout Description
8556 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8557 Can't nest into them.
8561 \begin_layout Itemize
8567 \begin_layout Itemize
8573 \begin_layout Itemize
8579 \begin_layout Itemize
8585 \begin_layout Itemize
8592 \begin_layout Description
8594 \begin_inset space ~
8597 Nestable You can nest them.
8598 You can nest other things into them.
8602 \begin_layout Itemize
8608 \begin_layout Itemize
8614 \begin_layout Itemize
8620 \begin_layout Itemize
8626 \begin_layout Itemize
8632 \begin_layout Itemize
8638 \begin_layout Itemize
8644 \begin_layout Itemize
8651 \begin_layout Itemize
8657 \begin_layout Itemize
8664 \begin_layout Description
8665 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8666 You can't nest anything into them.
8670 \begin_layout Itemize
8676 \begin_layout Itemize
8682 \begin_layout Itemize
8688 \begin_layout Itemize
8694 \begin_layout Itemize
8700 \begin_layout Itemize
8706 \begin_layout Itemize
8712 \begin_layout Itemize
8718 \begin_layout Itemize
8724 \begin_layout Itemize
8730 \begin_layout Itemize
8736 \begin_layout Itemize
8742 \begin_layout Itemize
8748 \begin_layout Itemize
8752 \begin_inset space ~
8758 \begin_layout Itemize
8765 \begin_layout Standard
8766 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8774 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8784 \begin_inset space ~
8787 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8788 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8789 nested section headings violate this.
8797 \begin_layout Subsection
8798 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8799 \begin_inset Index idx
8802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8803 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8811 \begin_layout Standard
8812 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8813 affected by nesting anyhow.
8817 \begin_layout Itemize
8821 \begin_layout Itemize
8825 \begin_layout Itemize
8829 \begin_layout Standard
8831 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8839 Figures and tables in
8843 are not affected by this.
8848 Have a look at section
8849 \begin_inset space ~
8853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8855 reference "sec:Floats"
8859 for more information about
8866 \begin_layout Standard
8868 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8869 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8873 \begin_layout Standard
8874 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8882 of its own, it behaves just like a
8883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8890 paragraph environment.
8891 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8895 \begin_layout Standard
8896 Here's an example with a table:
8899 \begin_layout Enumerate
8904 \begin_layout Enumerate
8905 This is (a) and it's nested.
8909 \begin_layout Standard
8910 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8916 \begin_layout Standard
8918 \begin_inset Tabular
8919 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8920 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8921 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8922 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9006 \begin_layout Standard
9007 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9014 \begin_layout Enumerate
9016 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9020 \begin_layout Enumerate
9024 \begin_layout Standard
9025 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9028 \begin_layout Enumerate
9033 \begin_layout Enumerate
9034 This is (a) and it's nested.
9038 \begin_layout Standard
9039 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9045 \begin_layout Standard
9047 \begin_inset Tabular
9048 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9049 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9050 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9051 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9135 \begin_layout Standard
9136 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9142 \begin_layout Enumerate
9149 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9152 \begin_layout Enumerate
9156 \begin_layout Standard
9157 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9161 \begin_layout Standard
9162 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9165 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9168 \begin_layout Enumerate
9173 \begin_layout Enumerate
9174 This is (a) and it's nested.
9177 \begin_layout Standard
9178 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9184 \begin_layout Standard
9186 \begin_inset Tabular
9187 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9188 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9189 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9190 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9275 \begin_layout Standard
9276 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9282 \begin_layout Enumerate
9284 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9291 \begin_layout Enumerate
9295 \begin_layout Standard
9296 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9302 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9303 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9307 \begin_layout Subsection
9308 Usage and General Features
9311 \begin_layout Standard
9312 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9313 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9322 is the innermost possible depth.
9323 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9326 \begin_layout Enumerate
9327 level #1 – outermost
9331 \begin_layout Enumerate
9336 \begin_layout Enumerate
9341 \begin_layout Enumerate
9346 \begin_layout Itemize
9351 \begin_layout Itemize
9360 \begin_layout Standard
9361 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9362 both of them in the example.
9363 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9373 For example, if we tried to nest another
9378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9385 , we would get errors.
9388 \begin_layout Subsection
9390 \begin_inset Index idx
9393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9402 \begin_layout Standard
9403 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9404 We have several examples of nested environments.
9405 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9409 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9410 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9413 \begin_layout Labeling
9414 \labelwidthstring MMM
9415 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9424 \begin_layout Labeling
9425 \labelwidthstring MMM
9426 #2-a This is level #2.
9427 We created it by using
9430 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9436 arg "depth-increment"
9443 \begin_layout Labeling
9444 \labelwidthstring MMM
9445 #3-a This is level #3.
9446 This time, we just enter
9453 arg "depth-increment"
9457 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9461 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9467 arg "depth-increment"
9474 \begin_layout Standard
9479 environment, nested inside of
9480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9488 So, it's at level #4.
9489 We did this by entering
9492 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9498 arg "depth-increment"
9501 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9506 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9522 \begin_layout Standard
9527 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9530 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9536 \begin_layout Labeling
9537 \labelwidthstring MMM
9538 #4-a This is level #4.
9542 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9545 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9550 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9554 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9559 keep nesting things inside
9560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9571 \begin_layout Labeling
9572 \labelwidthstring MMM
9573 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9578 \begin_layout Labeling
9579 \labelwidthstring MMM
9580 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9581 and this is level #6.
9582 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9586 \begin_layout Labeling
9587 \labelwidthstring MMM
9588 #5-b Back to level #5.
9592 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9598 arg "depth-decrement"
9605 \begin_layout Labeling
9606 \labelwidthstring MMM
9610 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9616 arg "depth-decrement"
9619 , we're back at level #4.
9623 \begin_layout Labeling
9624 \labelwidthstring MMM
9625 #3-b Back to level #3.
9626 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9630 \begin_layout Labeling
9631 \labelwidthstring MMM
9632 #2-b Back to level #2.
9637 \begin_layout Labeling
9638 \labelwidthstring MMM
9639 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9640 After this sentence, we will enter
9644 and change the paragraph environment back to
9651 \begin_layout Standard
9652 We could have also used the
9668 environment in place of the
9673 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9676 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9677 Example 2: Inheritance
9680 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9681 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9684 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9693 arg "depth-increment"
9697 \begin_inset Newline newline
9700 which, we will change to the
9708 \begin_layout Enumerate
9713 environment, at level #2.
9716 \begin_layout Enumerate
9717 Notice how the nested
9721 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9725 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9729 \begin_layout Standard
9730 We ended this example by entering
9735 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9739 and reset the nesting depth by using
9742 arg "depth-decrement"
9748 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9749 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9758 \begin_inset Argument 1
9761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9762 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9770 \begin_layout Enumerate
9771 This is level #1, in an
9775 paragraph environment.
9776 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9780 \begin_layout Enumerate
9785 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9791 arg "depth-increment"
9795 Now, what happens if we nest an
9799 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9800 label be? An asterisk?
9804 \begin_layout Itemize
9814 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9815 So, its label is a bullet.
9816 (We got here by using
9819 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9825 arg "depth-increment"
9828 , then changing the environment to
9836 \begin_layout Itemize
9837 Here's level #4, produced using
9840 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9846 arg "depth-increment"
9850 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9855 \begin_layout Enumerate
9858 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9863 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9867 , because we are in the
9875 environment (that is, it is an
9890 \begin_layout Enumerate
9895 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9896 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9900 \begin_layout Enumerate
9901 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9904 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9907 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9910 \begin_layout Enumerate
9914 arg "depth-decrement"
9917 to decrease the depth after the next
9920 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9927 \begin_layout Enumerate
9929 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9934 \begin_layout Enumerate
9936 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9937 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9941 \begin_layout Enumerate
9942 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9951 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9956 reset the counter for the label.
9960 \begin_layout Enumerate
9964 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9970 arg "depth-decrement"
9973 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9974 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9975 into the twofold-nested
9983 \begin_layout Enumerate
9984 The same thing happens if we do another
9987 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9993 arg "depth-decrement"
9996 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9999 \begin_layout Standard
10000 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10005 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10016 The number of other
10020 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10027 The same rule applies for the
10031 environment, as well.
10034 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10035 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10038 \begin_layout Enumerate
10039 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10040 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10041 the same detail with how we did it.
10050 \begin_layout Standard
10058 arg "depth-increment"
10065 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10066 the example in parentheses someplace.
10067 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10068 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10069 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10073 \begin_layout Enumerate
10078 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10082 \begin_layout Verse
10083 Now we will add verse.
10084 \begin_inset Newline newline
10087 It will get much worse.
10088 \begin_inset Newline newline
10098 arg "depth-increment"
10108 \begin_layout Verse
10109 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10110 \begin_inset Newline newline
10113 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10114 \begin_inset Newline newline
10120 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10128 \begin_layout Verse
10129 Here comes a table:
10133 \begin_layout Standard
10134 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10140 \begin_layout Standard
10142 \begin_inset Tabular
10143 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10144 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10145 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10146 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10231 \begin_layout Verse
10235 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10245 arg "depth-increment"
10251 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10257 \begin_inset Newline newline
10265 arg "depth-decrement"
10272 \begin_layout Enumerate
10277 : level #1) This is another item.
10278 Note that selecting a
10282 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10283 3 times to put the table inside the
10291 \begin_layout Quotation
10292 We're now ending the
10296 list and changing to
10301 We're still at level #1.
10302 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10303 The next set of paragraphs is a
10304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10311 We will nest both the
10318 \begin_inset space ~
10323 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10327 for the letter body.
10331 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10334 to preserve the depth.
10335 Remember that you need to use
10338 arg "newline-insert newline"
10341 to create multiple lines inside the
10348 \begin_inset space ~
10358 \begin_layout Right Address
10360 \begin_inset Newline newline
10363 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10364 \begin_inset Newline newline
10370 \begin_layout Address
10372 \begin_inset space ~
10378 \begin_layout Quotation
10379 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10380 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10383 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10384 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10385 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10386 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10387 as soon as possible.
10388 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10391 \begin_layout Quotation
10392 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10393 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10394 with your order, along with payment.
10397 \begin_layout Quotation
10398 We thank you again for your patience.
10401 \begin_layout Address
10403 \begin_inset Newline newline
10410 \begin_layout Quotation
10411 That ends that example!
10414 \begin_layout Standard
10415 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10416 gives you a lot of power with just
10418 We could have easily nested an
10439 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10442 \begin_layout Subsection
10444 \begin_inset Index idx
10447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10448 Nesting ! Separation
10454 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10456 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10463 \begin_layout Standard
10464 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10466 For example you need two different enumerations:
10469 \begin_layout Enumerate
10474 \begin_layout Enumerate
10479 \begin_layout Enumerate
10483 \begin_layout Standard
10484 \begin_inset Separator plain
10490 \begin_layout Itemize
10496 \begin_layout Standard
10497 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10503 \begin_layout Enumerate
10507 \begin_layout Enumerate
10511 \begin_layout Enumerate
10515 \begin_layout Standard
10516 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10517 list item and use the menu
10519 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10520 Start New Environment
10523 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10524 ) and behind it the new list.
10527 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10528 Start New Parent Environment
10530 only appears if the item is nested.
10531 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10535 \begin_layout Standard
10536 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10537 (red arrow in LyX).
10538 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10539 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10542 \begin_layout Standard
10543 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10546 arg "paragraph-break"
10553 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10556 \begin_layout Section
10557 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10558 \begin_inset Index idx
10561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10570 \begin_layout Standard
10571 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10572 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10574 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10575 be broken at the end of a line.
10576 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10580 \begin_layout Subsection
10582 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10584 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10589 \begin_inset Index idx
10592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10601 \begin_layout Standard
10602 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10603 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10604 ) not to break the line at
10606 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10609 \begin_layout Quote
10610 Further documentation is given in section
10611 \begin_inset Newline newline
10615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10617 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10625 \begin_layout Standard
10626 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10639 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10641 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10650 A protected space is set with
10652 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10653 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10655 \begin_inset space ~
10663 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10669 \begin_layout Subsection
10671 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10673 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10678 \begin_inset Index idx
10681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10682 Spacing ! Horizontal
10690 \begin_layout Standard
10691 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10693 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10694 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10698 The length units are listed in Appendix
10699 \begin_inset space ~
10703 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10705 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10712 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10714 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10716 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10721 \begin_inset Index idx
10724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10725 Spaces ! Inter-word
10733 \begin_layout Standard
10734 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10735 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10736 at the ends of sentences.
10737 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10738 automatically takes care about this.
10739 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10740 followed by a period; see section
10741 \begin_inset space ~
10745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10747 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10752 To insert a normal space, select
10754 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10755 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10757 \begin_inset space ~
10765 arg "space-insert normal"
10771 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10773 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10775 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10780 \begin_inset Index idx
10783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10792 \begin_layout Standard
10794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10801 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10810 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10811 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10812 inside abbreviations:
10815 \begin_layout Quote
10817 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10821 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10824 \begin_layout Standard
10825 or between values and units.
10826 Compare for example this:
10827 \begin_inset Newline newline
10831 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10835 \begin_inset Newline newline
10838 10 kg (normal space
10841 \begin_layout Standard
10842 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10844 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10845 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10847 \begin_inset space ~
10855 arg "space-insert thin"
10861 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10865 \begin_layout Standard
10866 You can also insert the following space types:
10869 \begin_layout Description
10871 \begin_inset space ~
10875 \begin_inset space ~
10878 space A line with a
10879 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10883 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10887 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10890 negative thin space between the arrows.
10893 \begin_layout Description
10895 \begin_inset space ~
10899 \begin_inset space ~
10902 space A line with a
10903 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10907 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10911 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10914 negative medium space between the arrows.
10917 \begin_layout Description
10919 \begin_inset space ~
10923 \begin_inset space ~
10926 space A line with a
10927 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10931 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10935 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10938 negative thick space between the arrows.
10941 \begin_layout Description
10943 \begin_inset space ~
10947 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10951 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10955 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10959 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10963 \begin_inset space ~
10967 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10970 em) space between the arrows.
10973 \begin_layout Description
10975 \begin_inset space ~
10979 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10983 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10987 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10991 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10995 \begin_inset space ~
10999 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11002 em) space between the arrows.
11005 \begin_layout Description
11007 \begin_inset space ~
11011 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11015 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11019 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11023 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11027 \begin_inset space ~
11031 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11034 em) space between the arrows.
11037 \begin_layout Description
11039 \begin_inset space ~
11043 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11047 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11052 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11056 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11059 cm space between the arrows.
11062 \begin_layout Standard
11064 \begin_inset space ~
11068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11070 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11074 lists the different space sizes.
11077 \begin_layout Standard
11078 \begin_inset Float table
11083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11084 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11087 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11089 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11093 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11103 \begin_inset Tabular
11104 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11105 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11106 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11107 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11147 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11171 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11195 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11219 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11223 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11227 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11251 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11275 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11303 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11318 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11331 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11346 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11359 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11380 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11382 \begin_inset Index idx
11385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11394 \begin_layout Standard
11395 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11396 feature for adding extra space
11397 in a uniform fashion.
11398 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11399 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11400 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11401 equally between themselves.
11404 \begin_layout Standard
11405 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11408 \begin_layout Quote
11410 This is on the left side
11411 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11414 This is on the right
11417 \begin_layout Quote
11420 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11424 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11430 \begin_layout Quote
11433 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11437 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11441 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11447 \begin_layout Standard
11448 That was an example in the
11454 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11458 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11462 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11465 is one in a standard paragraph.
11466 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11470 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11473 \begin_layout Standard
11474 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11477 \begin_inset space ~
11482 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11485 \begin_layout Standard
11487 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11491 \begin_inset space ~
11497 \begin_layout Standard
11499 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11503 \begin_inset space ~
11509 \begin_layout Standard
11511 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11515 \begin_inset space ~
11521 \begin_layout Standard
11523 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11527 \begin_inset space ~
11533 \begin_layout Standard
11535 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11539 \begin_inset space ~
11545 \begin_layout Standard
11547 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11551 \begin_inset space ~
11557 \begin_layout Standard
11558 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11566 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11570 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11572 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11573 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11577 option in the space dialog.
11585 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11587 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11589 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11594 \begin_inset Index idx
11597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11606 \begin_layout Standard
11607 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11608 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11611 \begin_layout Standard
11612 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11615 What is correct English?:
11616 \begin_inset Newline newline
11620 \begin_inset Newline newline
11624 \begin_inset space ~
11627 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11628 \begin_inset Newline newline
11632 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11643 \begin_inset Newline newline
11647 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11658 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11664 \begin_layout Standard
11666 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11671 \begin_inset space ~
11675 \begin_inset space ~
11679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11683 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11685 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11686 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11690 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11696 \begin_inset space ~
11700 \begin_inset space ~
11704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11707 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11716 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11717 That is why it is named
11718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11726 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11727 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11731 \begin_layout Subsection
11733 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11735 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11740 \begin_inset Index idx
11743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11752 \begin_layout Standard
11753 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11755 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11756 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11758 \begin_inset space ~
11764 There you find the following sizes:
11767 \begin_layout Standard
11780 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11781 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11786 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11788 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11789 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11791 \begin_inset space ~
11797 \begin_inset Index idx
11800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11801 Document ! Settings
11806 for the paragraph separation.
11807 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11818 \begin_layout Standard
11824 \begin_inset Index idx
11827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11833 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11834 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11839 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11840 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11849 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11858 s are described in section
11859 \begin_inset space ~
11863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11865 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11874 If there are several
11878 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11879 You can therefore use
11883 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11886 \begin_layout Standard
11891 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11892 \begin_inset space ~
11896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11898 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11905 \begin_layout Standard
11906 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11916 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11917 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11929 \begin_layout Subsection
11930 Paragraph Alignment
11931 \begin_inset Index idx
11934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11935 Paragraph ! Alignment
11943 \begin_layout Standard
11944 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11946 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11949 dialog (toolbar button
11952 arg "layout-paragraph"
11956 There are five possibilities:
11959 \begin_layout Itemize
11967 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11973 \begin_layout Itemize
11981 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11987 \begin_layout Itemize
11995 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12001 \begin_layout Itemize
12009 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12015 \begin_layout Itemize
12023 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12029 \begin_layout Standard
12030 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12031 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12032 the left and right margins.
12033 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12036 \begin_layout Standard
12038 This paragraph is right aligned,
12041 \begin_layout Standard
12043 this one is centered,
12046 \begin_layout Standard
12048 this one is left aligned.
12051 \begin_layout Subsection
12053 \begin_inset Index idx
12056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12057 Page breaks ! Forced
12063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12065 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12072 \begin_layout Standard
12073 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12074 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12075 force a page break where you want one.
12076 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12077 is good at page breaking.
12078 Only if you use a lot of
12082 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12083 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12086 \begin_layout Standard
12087 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12088 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12092 have to change the page breaking.
12095 \begin_layout Standard
12096 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12098 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12100 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12101 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12103 \begin_inset space ~
12109 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12111 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12112 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12114 \begin_inset space ~
12119 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12121 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12122 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12125 \begin_layout Standard
12126 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12127 at the top of a page.
12128 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12130 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12131 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12132 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12136 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12140 to learn more about
12147 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12149 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12151 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12156 \begin_inset Index idx
12159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12160 Page breaks ! Clear
12168 \begin_layout Standard
12169 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12170 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12171 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12172 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12173 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12176 \begin_layout Standard
12177 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12179 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12180 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12182 \begin_inset space ~
12188 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12190 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12191 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12193 \begin_inset space ~
12197 \begin_inset space ~
12202 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12203 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12206 \begin_layout Subsection
12208 \begin_inset Index idx
12211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12218 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12220 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12227 \begin_layout Standard
12228 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12230 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12232 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12233 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12235 \begin_inset space ~
12239 \begin_inset space ~
12247 arg "newline-insert newline"
12251 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12253 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12254 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12256 \begin_inset space ~
12260 \begin_inset space ~
12268 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12271 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12273 This is useful to avoid
12274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12281 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12284 \begin_layout Standard
12285 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12286 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12288 very good at line breaking.
12289 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12290 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12291 \begin_inset space ~
12295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12297 reference "sec:Quote"
12302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12304 reference "sec:Verse"
12309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12311 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12318 \begin_layout Subsection
12320 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12322 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12327 \begin_inset Index idx
12330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12339 \begin_layout Standard
12341 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12352 \begin_layout Standard
12356 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12357 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12359 \begin_inset space ~
12364 you can insert horizontal lines.
12365 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12366 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12367 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12370 \begin_layout Standard
12372 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12383 \begin_layout Section
12384 Characters and Symbols
12387 \begin_layout Standard
12388 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12389 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12390 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12398 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12402 for information on how this is done.
12405 \begin_layout Standard
12406 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12411 dialog via the menu
12413 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12414 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12420 \begin_layout Standard
12421 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12429 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12430 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12432 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12440 \begin_layout Section
12441 Fonts and Text Styles
12442 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12444 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12451 \begin_layout Subsection
12453 \begin_inset Index idx
12456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12465 \begin_layout Standard
12466 There are two types of fonts:
12469 \begin_layout Description
12471 \begin_inset space ~
12475 \begin_inset Index idx
12478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12484 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12485 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12489 characters) in the font.
12490 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12491 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12492 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12493 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12494 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12495 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12496 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12497 \begin_inset Newline newline
12500 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12501 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12502 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12503 sizes than at small ones.
12504 \begin_inset Newline newline
12518 \begin_inset space ~
12526 \begin_layout Description
12528 \begin_inset space ~
12532 \begin_inset Index idx
12535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12541 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12542 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12543 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12544 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12545 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12546 image manipulation program.
12547 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12548 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12549 \begin_inset space ~
12552 pixels high up to 34
12553 \begin_inset space ~
12556 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12557 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12558 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12560 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12561 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12562 \begin_inset Newline newline
12565 Bitmap fonts are named
12568 \begin_inset space ~
12573 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12576 \begin_layout Standard
12577 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12578 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12579 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12580 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12581 use scalable fonts.
12584 \begin_layout Standard
12585 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12588 \begin_layout Standard
12589 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12590 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12591 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12592 font to emphasize text, you use an
12593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12601 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12603 In \SpecialChar LyX
12604 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12608 \begin_layout Subsection
12611 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12613 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12620 \begin_layout Standard
12621 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12622 used its own fonts.
12623 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12624 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12627 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12628 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12629 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12630 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12631 to a word processor.
12632 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12633 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12634 files are very portable across
12635 different machines.
12636 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12637 has increased a lot
12638 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12641 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12643 \begin_inset space ~
12647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12649 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12654 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12655 code in the document
12656 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12659 \begin_layout Standard
12660 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12661 engines that are also able directly
12662 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12664 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12666 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12668 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12669 that is installed on your system.
12670 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12673 \begin_layout Standard
12674 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12682 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12683 es; so you might have to experiment.
12691 \begin_layout Subsection
12692 Document Font and Font size
12693 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12695 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12700 \begin_inset Index idx
12703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12710 \begin_inset Index idx
12713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12722 \begin_layout Standard
12723 You can set the document fonts in the
12725 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12729 \begin_inset Index idx
12732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12733 Document ! Settings
12743 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12744 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12747 \begin_inset space ~
12756 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12758 \begin_inset space ~
12761 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12764 \begin_layout Standard
12769 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12770 This requires that you use
12782 as the output format, i.
12783 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12787 \begin_inset space \space{}
12790 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12791 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12792 installed (see section
12793 \begin_inset space ~
12797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12799 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12804 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12806 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12807 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12809 \begin_inset space ~
12812 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12813 cannot determine the family.
12814 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12815 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12818 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12821 \begin_layout Standard
12822 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12823 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12828 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12834 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12835 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12843 \begin_inset space ~
12849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12862 European Computer Modern
12865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12872 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12875 \begin_layout Standard
12884 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12885 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12890 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12893 \begin_inset space ~
12898 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12904 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12905 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12908 \begin_layout Itemize
12912 \begin_inset space ~
12917 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12930 \begin_inset space ~
12935 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12936 community in order to replace
12940 as the default font.
12941 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12942 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12945 \begin_inset space ~
12958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12959 One difference is improved kerning.
12967 \begin_layout Itemize
12971 \begin_inset space ~
12975 \begin_inset space ~
12980 fonts in (the rare) case that
12983 \begin_inset space ~
12988 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
13003 Virtual means that it
13004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13015 -glyphs from other fonts.
13016 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
13018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13038 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13044 \begin_inset Index idx
13047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13049 -packages ! aeguill
13054 with the document preamble line
13055 \begin_inset Newline newline
13062 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
13063 \begin_inset Newline newline
13068 will fix the guillemet problem.
13073 and that accented characters are not
13077 glyph, but built of
13081 characters, the accent and the letter.
13082 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
13088 If you search for example for the French word
13089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13096 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
13098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13105 and not for the glyph
13106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13110 \begin_inset space ~
13114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13120 \begin_layout Itemize
13121 If you do not like the look of
13129 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13130 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13134 \begin_inset space ~
13140 \begin_inset space ~
13150 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13151 \begin_inset space ~
13154 serif and typewriter fonts,
13158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13159 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13160 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13166 \begin_inset space ~
13175 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13176 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13180 \begin_inset space \space{}
13188 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13192 \begin_inset space \space{}
13198 \begin_inset space ~
13206 \begin_inset space ~
13216 but you can also select your own.
13217 \begin_inset Newline newline
13220 The differences between roman,
13223 \begin_inset space ~
13232 fonts are explained in section
13233 \begin_inset space ~
13237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13239 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13244 \begin_inset Newline newline
13250 \begin_inset space ~
13255 was originally designed for newspapers.
13256 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13257 into the small newspaper columns.
13261 \begin_inset space ~
13266 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13269 \begin_layout Standard
13270 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13283 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13288 depends on the class you are using.
13289 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13292 \begin_layout Standard
13293 Note that the font size is the
13298 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13299 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13300 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13301 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13304 \begin_inset space ~
13310 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13311 \begin_inset space ~
13315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13317 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13324 \begin_layout Standard
13328 \begin_inset space ~
13333 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13335 \begin_inset space ~
13338 serif or typewriter.
13343 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13353 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13356 \begin_layout Standard
13361 LaTeX font encoding
13363 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13364 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13370 \begin_inset Index idx
13373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13375 -packages ! fontenc
13381 \begin_inset space ~
13385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13387 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13392 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13393 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13400 \begin_layout Standard
13401 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13403 Use Old Style Figures
13407 Use True Small Caps
13410 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13413 Use Old Style Figures
13415 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13417 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13418 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13422 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13425 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13429 Use True Small Caps
13431 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13432 of scaled capitals.
13433 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13434 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13437 \begin_layout Standard
13442 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13443 a font to display the script characters.
13447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13448 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13454 \begin_inset Index idx
13457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13464 So this has no effect for the document language
13478 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13482 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13490 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13495 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13496 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13498 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13500 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13503 dialog, see section
13504 \begin_inset space ~
13508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13510 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13522 \begin_layout Subsection
13526 \begin_layout Standard
13527 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13528 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13530 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13531 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13532 choose a math font in the dialog
13534 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13538 \begin_inset Index idx
13541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13542 Document ! Settings
13548 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13549 automatically selects a math font.
13550 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13551 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13560 \begin_inset space ~
13566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13571 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13572 document font is available.
13575 \begin_layout Standard
13576 Note that the math font will not be used for
13580 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13586 or by the insertion of the command
13593 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13594 \begin_inset space ~
13598 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13599 while the math characters do not.
13601 \begin_inset space ~
13604 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13607 \begin_inset space ~
13615 \begin_inset space ~
13620 in the document font settings.
13623 \begin_layout Standard
13624 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13625 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13626 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13627 font (in most cases
13628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13634 \begin_inset space ~
13640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13643 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13644 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13652 \begin_inset space ~
13658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13664 \begin_layout Subsection
13665 Using Different Character Styles
13666 \begin_inset Index idx
13669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13676 \begin_inset Index idx
13679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13688 \begin_layout Standard
13689 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13690 automatically changes the character style for certain
13691 paragraph environments.
13693 supports two character styles,
13702 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13706 \begin_layout Standard
13711 style, do one of the following:
13714 \begin_layout Itemize
13715 click on the toolbar button
13724 \begin_layout Itemize
13725 use the key binding
13734 \begin_layout Standard
13735 These commands are all toggles.
13740 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13743 \begin_layout Standard
13744 One typically uses the
13748 style for proper names.
13750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13757 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13765 \begin_layout Standard
13766 A more widely used character style is the
13771 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13778 \begin_layout Itemize
13779 clicking on the toolbar button
13788 \begin_layout Itemize
13789 using the keybindings
13798 \begin_layout Standard
13803 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13805 use a different font.
13808 \begin_layout Standard
13809 We've been using the
13813 style all over the place in this document.
13814 Here's one more example:
13817 \begin_layout Quotation
13820 Do not overuse character styles!
13823 \begin_layout Standard
13824 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13825 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13826 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13827 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13831 \begin_layout Standard
13832 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13840 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13842 \begin_inset space ~
13845 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13851 arg "dialog-show character"
13857 \begin_layout Subsection
13858 Fine-Tuning with the
13863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13865 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13870 \begin_inset Index idx
13873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13882 \begin_layout Standard
13883 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13885 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13886 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13887 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13888 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13889 from ordinary dialog.
13892 \begin_layout Standard
13893 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13894 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13895 \begin_inset Newline newline
13898 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13899 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13902 \begin_layout Standard
13903 To use custom character styles, open the
13905 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13907 \begin_inset space ~
13910 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13913 dialog or press the toolbar button
13916 arg "dialog-show character"
13920 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13921 font property that you can choose.
13922 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13925 \begin_inset space ~
13930 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13935 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13936 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13937 environments all at once.
13940 \begin_layout Standard
13941 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13944 \begin_inset space ~
13956 \begin_layout Labeling
13957 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13971 The possible options are:
13975 \begin_layout Labeling
13976 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13981 This is the Roman font family.
13982 Normally a serif font.
13983 It's also the default family.
13993 \begin_layout Labeling
13994 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13998 \begin_inset space ~
14005 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14017 \begin_layout Labeling
14018 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14025 This is the Typewriter font family.
14031 arg "font-typewriter"
14040 \begin_layout Labeling
14041 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14046 This corresponds to the print weight.
14051 \begin_layout Labeling
14052 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14057 This is the Medium font series.
14058 It's also the default series.
14061 \begin_layout Labeling
14062 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14069 This is the Bold font series.
14082 \begin_layout Labeling
14083 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14088 As the name implies.
14093 \begin_layout Labeling
14094 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14099 This is the Upright font shape.
14100 It's also the default shape.
14103 \begin_layout Labeling
14104 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14118 s the Italic font shape
14124 \begin_layout Labeling
14125 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14132 This is the Slanted font shape
14134 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14135 , this is different from italic).
14138 \begin_layout Labeling
14139 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14143 \begin_inset space ~
14150 This is the Small caps font shape
14157 \begin_layout Labeling
14158 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14163 Alters the text color.
14164 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14168 \begin_inset space ~
14173 , which means that the document default color set in
14175 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14176 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14182 \begin_inset space ~
14187 is used, you can choose between
14264 \begin_inset Index idx
14267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14276 \begin_layout Labeling
14277 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14282 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14283 the language of the document.
14284 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14285 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14287 \begin_inset Newline newline
14290 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14292 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14293 When using the spell checking (see section
14294 \begin_inset space ~
14298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14300 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14304 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14307 \begin_layout Labeling
14308 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14313 Alters the size of the font.
14314 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14315 proportional to the document font size.
14316 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14317 the details, but a general description of what
14323 \begin_layout Labeling
14324 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14345 arg "font-size tiny"
14351 \begin_layout Labeling
14352 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14373 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14379 \begin_layout Labeling
14380 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14401 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14407 \begin_layout Labeling
14408 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14429 arg "font-size small"
14435 \begin_layout Labeling
14436 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14450 It's also the default size.
14454 arg "font-size normal"
14460 \begin_layout Labeling
14461 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14482 arg "font-size large"
14488 \begin_layout Labeling
14489 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14510 arg "font-size larger"
14516 \begin_layout Labeling
14517 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14538 arg "font-size largest"
14544 \begin_layout Labeling
14545 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14566 arg "font-size huge"
14572 \begin_layout Labeling
14573 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14594 arg "font-size giant"
14600 \begin_layout Labeling
14601 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14606 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14626 arg "font-size increase"
14632 \begin_layout Labeling
14633 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14638 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14658 arg "font-size decrease"
14665 \begin_layout Standard
14670 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14671 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14673 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14674 — use those instead.
14675 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14678 \begin_layout Labeling
14679 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14684 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14689 \begin_layout Labeling
14690 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14697 This is text with emphasize on
14700 This might seem like the same as
14704 , but it is actually a bit different.
14710 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14712 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14715 \begin_layout Labeling
14716 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14723 This is text with Underbar on.
14729 arg "font-underline"
14735 \begin_inset Newline newline
14740 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14741 when you could not change fonts.
14742 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14743 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14744 because some people
14748 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14751 \begin_layout Labeling
14752 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14756 \begin_inset space ~
14763 This is text with Double underbar on.
14769 arg "font-underunderline"
14773 \begin_inset Newline newline
14776 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14777 about double underbar.
14780 \begin_layout Labeling
14781 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14785 \begin_inset space ~
14792 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14798 arg "font-underwave"
14802 \begin_inset Newline newline
14805 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14806 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14809 \begin_layout Labeling
14810 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14817 This is text with Strikeout on.
14823 arg "font-strikeout"
14827 \begin_inset Newline newline
14830 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14831 changed in the meantime.
14834 \begin_layout Labeling
14835 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14842 This is text with Noun on.
14849 , this is a logical attribute.
14850 Normally it's equivalent to
14853 \begin_inset space ~
14862 \begin_layout Standard
14863 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14864 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14866 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14868 \begin_inset space ~
14871 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14877 arg "dialog-show character"
14880 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14881 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14884 arg "textstyle-apply"
14888 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14892 \begin_layout Standard
14893 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14900 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14901 (suppose you just set the shape to
14902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14920 \begin_inset space ~
14932 \begin_layout Standard
14933 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14941 \begin_inset space ~
14953 \begin_layout Itemize
14959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14966 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14984 \begin_inset Newline newline
14988 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15002 \begin_inset Note Note
15005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15006 For more on phantoms see section
15007 \begin_inset space ~
15011 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15013 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15023 \begin_inset Newline newline
15029 \begin_layout Itemize
15034 fonts use characters with serifs.
15035 These are the small
15036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15043 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15044 The following example shows the difference:
15045 \begin_inset Newline newline
15049 \begin_inset Newline newline
15054 text without serifs
15057 \begin_inset Newline newline
15060 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15061 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15068 \begin_layout Itemize
15073 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15074 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15075 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15078 \begin_layout Standard
15079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15086 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15087 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15090 \begin_inset space ~
15095 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15096 the property to be removed.
15097 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15098 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15099 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15117 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15118 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15126 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15130 \begin_inset space ~
15135 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15146 If you, for example, set
15147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15165 \begin_inset space ~
15170 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15179 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15182 \begin_layout Standard
15183 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15184 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15187 \begin_layout Section
15188 Printing and Previewing
15191 \begin_layout Subsection
15195 \begin_layout Standard
15196 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15197 using \SpecialChar LyX
15198 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15199 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15200 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15201 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15203 Additional Features
15208 \begin_layout Standard
15210 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15213 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15214 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15215 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15218 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15219 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15220 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15221 to turn your writing into printable output.
15222 This happens in two stages:
15225 \begin_layout Enumerate
15226 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15227 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15229 a file with the extension,
15230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15244 \begin_layout Enumerate
15245 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15246 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15247 to use the commands in the
15251 file to produce printable output.
15254 \begin_layout Subsection
15255 Output file formats
15256 \begin_inset Index idx
15259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15266 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15268 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15275 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15276 Simple text (ASCII)
15277 \begin_inset Index idx
15280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15281 File formats ! ASCII
15289 \begin_layout Standard
15290 This file type has the extension
15291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15303 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15307 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15314 \begin_layout Standard
15315 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15317 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15318 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15320 \begin_inset space ~
15326 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15327 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15328 bibliography (section
15329 \begin_inset space ~
15333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15335 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15340 If your document includes such material, use
15342 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15343 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15345 \begin_inset space ~
15349 \begin_inset space ~
15353 \begin_inset space ~
15361 \begin_inset space ~
15365 \begin_inset space ~
15371 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15372 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15375 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15378 \begin_inset Index idx
15381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15382 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15391 \begin_layout Standard
15392 This file type has the extension
15393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15404 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15407 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15408 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15409 -Errors or to process it manually
15410 with console commands.
15411 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15412 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15413 's temporary directory whenever you
15414 view or export your document.
15417 \begin_layout Standard
15418 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15419 -file using the menu
15421 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15422 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15426 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15427 export variants are explained in section
15428 \begin_inset space ~
15432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15434 reference "subsec:Export"
15441 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15443 \begin_inset Index idx
15446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15455 \begin_layout Standard
15456 This file type has the extension
15457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15477 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15478 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15479 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15483 \begin_layout Standard
15484 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15485 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15486 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15487 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15488 when you view the DVI.
15489 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15492 \begin_layout Standard
15493 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15495 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15496 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15501 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15502 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15504 \begin_inset space ~
15510 The latter option uses the program
15512 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15518 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15521 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15522 font access (see section
15523 \begin_inset space ~
15527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15529 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15534 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15535 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15540 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15542 \begin_inset Index idx
15545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15546 File formats ! PostScript
15554 \begin_layout Standard
15555 This file type has the extension
15556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15568 PostScript was developed by the company
15572 as a printer language.
15573 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15575 PostScript can be seen as a
15576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15579 programming language
15580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15583 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15588 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15595 \begin_inset Index idx
15598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15600 -packages ! pstricks
15610 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15613 \begin_layout Standard
15614 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15618 Encapsulated PostScript
15619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15622 (EPS, file extension
15623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15635 As \SpecialChar LyX
15636 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15637 convert them in the background to EPS.
15638 If, for example, you have 50
15639 \begin_inset space ~
15642 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15644 \begin_inset space ~
15647 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15648 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15650 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15651 EPS to avoid this problem.
15654 \begin_layout Standard
15655 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15657 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15658 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15664 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15666 \begin_inset Index idx
15669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15676 \begin_inset Index idx
15679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15688 \begin_layout Standard
15689 This file type has the extension
15690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15706 Portable Document Format
15707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15714 was derived from PostScript.
15715 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15724 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15725 looks exactly the same.
15728 \begin_layout Standard
15729 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15733 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15737 (JPG, file extension
15738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15765 Portable Network Graphics
15766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15769 (PNG, file extension
15770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15782 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15783 converts them in the
15784 background to one of these formats.
15785 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15786 will slow down your workflow.
15787 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15790 \begin_layout Standard
15791 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15793 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15799 \begin_layout Description
15801 \begin_inset space ~
15804 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15808 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15811 \begin_layout Description
15813 \begin_inset space ~
15820 ) This uses the program
15822 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15825 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15828 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15831 is a new engine, derived from
15835 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15836 access (see section
15837 \begin_inset space ~
15841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15843 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15848 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15849 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15854 \begin_layout Description
15856 \begin_inset space ~
15863 ) This uses the program
15868 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15874 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15875 font access (see section
15876 \begin_inset space ~
15880 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15882 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15887 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15888 vertically written Japanese.
15891 \begin_layout Description
15893 \begin_inset space ~
15896 (cropped) This is the same as
15899 \begin_inset space ~
15904 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15905 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15906 to generate good-looking
15907 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15910 \begin_layout Description
15912 \begin_inset space ~
15915 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15919 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15923 \begin_layout Description
15925 \begin_inset space ~
15928 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15932 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15933 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15937 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15938 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15941 \begin_layout Standard
15945 \begin_inset space ~
15954 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15955 works without problems.
15956 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15957 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15961 \begin_inset space ~
15969 \begin_inset space ~
15974 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15982 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15984 \begin_inset Index idx
15987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15988 FileFormats ! XHTML
15994 \begin_inset Index idx
15997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16006 \begin_layout Standard
16007 This file type has the extension
16008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16020 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16021 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16022 When \SpecialChar LyX
16023 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16024 suitable for the purpose.
16025 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16027 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16028 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16031 between different formats, which are described in section
16033 Math Output in XHTML
16038 \begin_inset space ~
16046 \begin_layout Standard
16047 XHTML output remains
16048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16055 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16056 features are supported yet.
16060 and the World Wide Web
16064 Additional Features
16066 manual, for more information.
16069 \begin_layout Standard
16070 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16072 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16073 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16079 \begin_layout Subsection
16081 \begin_inset Index idx
16084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16093 \begin_layout Standard
16094 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16095 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16104 or use the toolbar button
16111 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16112 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16113 \begin_inset space ~
16117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16119 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16123 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16125 \begin_inset space ~
16129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16131 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16136 Further output formats can be selected via
16138 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16139 View (Other Formats)
16141 or the toolbar button
16150 \begin_layout Standard
16151 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16152 viewer window using the menu
16154 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16159 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16160 Update (Other Formats)
16165 \begin_layout Standard
16166 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16169 To have a real output, export your document.
16172 \begin_layout Section
16173 A few Words about Typography
16174 \begin_inset Index idx
16177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16186 \begin_layout Subsection
16187 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16188 \begin_inset Index idx
16191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16198 \begin_inset Index idx
16201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16210 \begin_layout Standard
16211 In \SpecialChar LyX
16213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16224 character comes in four lengths: the
16236 , and the minus sign:
16237 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16243 \begin_layout Standard
16244 \begin_inset Tabular
16245 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16246 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16247 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16248 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16249 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16250 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16279 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16319 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16344 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16346 \begin_inset space ~
16349 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16356 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16381 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16383 \begin_inset space ~
16386 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16407 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16441 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16447 \begin_layout Standard
16448 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16460 character multiple times in a row.
16461 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16462 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16469 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16481 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16485 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16495 \begin_layout Standard
16496 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16497 math mode and has a length of its own.
16498 Here are some examples:
16501 \begin_layout Enumerate
16502 line- and page-breaks
16503 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16513 \begin_layout Enumerate
16515 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16525 \begin_layout Enumerate
16526 Oh — there's a dash.
16527 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16537 \begin_layout Enumerate
16538 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16542 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16552 \begin_layout Subsection
16554 \begin_inset Index idx
16557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16564 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16566 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16573 \begin_layout Standard
16574 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16575 but automatically in the output.
16576 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16582 \begin_inset Index idx
16585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16592 following the rules of the document language.
16595 \begin_layout Standard
16597 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16601 font and with unusual constructs, like
16602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16610 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16611 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16612 This is done with the menu
16614 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16615 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16617 \begin_inset space ~
16623 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16625 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16629 \begin_layout Standard
16630 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16631 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16642 would then see the hyphen
16643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16650 as a hyphenation possibility.
16651 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16652 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16653 as described in section
16655 Prevent Hyphenation
16660 \begin_inset space ~
16668 \begin_layout Subsection
16670 \begin_inset Index idx
16673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16682 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16683 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16686 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16693 \begin_layout Standard
16694 When \SpecialChar LyX
16695 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16696 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16698 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16704 appropriate amount of space.
16705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16708 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16710 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16711 gets after another word.
16714 \begin_layout Standard
16715 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16716 not work in all cases.
16718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16729 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16730 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16733 \begin_layout Standard
16734 Here are some examples of
16738 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16741 \begin_layout Itemize
16746 \begin_layout Itemize
16751 \begin_layout Standard
16752 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16755 \begin_layout Itemize
16757 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16761 this is too much space!
16764 \begin_layout Itemize
16769 \begin_layout Standard
16770 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16773 \begin_layout Standard
16774 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16777 \begin_layout Enumerate
16781 \begin_inset space ~
16786 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16787 \begin_inset space ~
16791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16793 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16798 \begin_inset Index idx
16801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16802 Spaces ! inter-word
16810 \begin_layout Enumerate
16814 \begin_inset space ~
16819 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16820 \begin_inset space ~
16824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16826 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16831 \begin_inset Index idx
16834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16843 \begin_layout Enumerate
16847 \begin_inset space ~
16851 \begin_inset space ~
16855 \begin_inset space ~
16862 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16864 \begin_inset space ~
16869 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16870 This function is also bound to
16873 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16879 \begin_layout Standard
16880 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16883 \begin_layout Itemize
16885 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16889 \begin_inset space \space{}
16892 this is too much space!
16895 \begin_layout Itemize
16896 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16900 \begin_layout Standard
16901 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16902 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16904 will take care of this.
16907 \begin_layout Standard
16908 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16912 \begin_inset space ~
16918 feature described in the section
16920 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16925 Additional Features
16930 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16932 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667523
16934 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669265
16938 \begin_inset Index idx
16941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16943 \change_deleted -712698321 1482669122
16945 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669123
16954 \begin_inset Index idx
16957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16959 \change_deleted -712698321 1482669129
16961 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669204
16968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16994 \begin_layout Standard
16997 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666231
16999 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666233
17003 Specifically, it will
17004 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667043
17006 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667044
17010 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666244
17012 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666245
17015 at the beginning of quoted text, and use a closing
17016 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666248
17018 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666249
17023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17031 The keyboard character,
17035 , generates this automatically.
17038 \begin_layout Standard
17039 You can specify what character the
17044 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669340
17048 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667059
17057 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17061 \begin_inset Index idx
17064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17065 Document ! Settings
17071 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667133
17073 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669342
17079 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667108
17082 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
17083 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language)
17087 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666221
17089 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666222
17095 \begin_layout Labeling
17096 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17099 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666593
17102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17110 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666647
17112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17120 \begin_inset space ~
17124 \begin_inset space ~
17128 \begin_inset Quotes els
17132 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17140 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666593
17142 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665592
17146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17150 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665595
17152 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666593
17156 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665605
17160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17164 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665637
17166 \begin_inset Quotes els
17170 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17173 quotation marks (as common, e.
17174 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17182 \begin_layout Labeling
17183 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17185 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666660
17188 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17192 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17196 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666671
17198 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17202 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17206 \begin_inset space ~
17210 \begin_inset space ~
17214 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17218 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17226 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666660
17227 Use quotes like ”this”
17228 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665692
17230 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17234 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17238 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17242 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17245 quotation marks (as common, e.
17246 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17254 \begin_layout Labeling
17255 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17257 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666683
17260 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17264 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17268 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666696
17270 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17274 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17278 \begin_inset space ~
17282 \begin_inset space ~
17286 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17290 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17298 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666683
17300 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17304 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17308 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665749
17310 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17314 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17318 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17322 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17325 quotation marks (as common, e.
17326 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17334 \begin_layout Labeling
17335 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17337 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666707
17340 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17344 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17348 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666716
17350 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17354 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17358 \begin_inset space ~
17362 \begin_inset space ~
17366 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17370 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17378 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666707
17380 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17384 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17388 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665786
17390 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17394 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17398 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17402 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17405 quotation marks (as common, e.
17406 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17414 \begin_layout Labeling
17415 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17417 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666725
17420 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17424 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17428 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666730
17430 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17434 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17438 \begin_inset space ~
17442 \begin_inset space ~
17446 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17450 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17458 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666725
17460 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17464 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17468 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665816
17470 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17474 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17478 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17482 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17485 quotation marks (as common, e.
17486 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17489 g., in Switzerland)
17494 \begin_layout Labeling
17495 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17497 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666741
17500 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17504 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17508 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666747
17510 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17514 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17518 \begin_inset space ~
17522 \begin_inset space ~
17526 \begin_inset Quotes als
17530 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17538 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666741
17540 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17544 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17548 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665851
17550 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17554 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17558 \begin_inset Quotes als
17562 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17565 quotation marks (as common, e.
17566 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17572 \begin_layout Labeling
17573 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17575 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666768
17578 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17582 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17586 \begin_inset space ~
17590 \begin_inset space ~
17594 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17598 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17604 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17608 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17612 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17616 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17619 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
17622 \begin_layout Labeling
17623 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17625 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666784
17628 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17632 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17636 \begin_inset space ~
17640 \begin_inset space ~
17644 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17648 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17654 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17658 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17662 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17666 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17669 quotation marks (as common, e.
17670 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17673 g., in Great Britain)
17676 \begin_layout Labeling
17677 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17679 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666803
17682 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17686 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17690 \begin_inset space ~
17694 \begin_inset space ~
17698 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17702 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17708 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17712 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17716 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17720 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17723 quotation marks (as common, e.
17724 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17730 \begin_layout Labeling
17731 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17733 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668207
17736 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17740 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17744 \begin_inset space ~
17748 \begin_inset space ~
17752 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17756 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17762 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17766 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17770 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17774 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17777 quotation marks (another style common in France)
17781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17783 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668407
17784 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
17785 since these look identical to the inner marks.
17786 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
17787 the inner marks differ).
17797 \begin_layout Labeling
17798 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17800 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666837
17803 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17807 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17811 \begin_inset space ~
17815 \begin_inset space ~
17819 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17823 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17829 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17833 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17837 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17841 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17844 quotation marks (as common, e.
17845 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17851 \begin_layout Labeling
17852 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17854 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666852
17857 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17861 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17865 \begin_inset space ~
17869 \begin_inset space ~
17873 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17877 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17883 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17887 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17891 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17895 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17898 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
17903 \begin_layout Standard
17905 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667281
17907 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667281
17911 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666272
17913 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667398
17918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17920 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668512
17921 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
17922 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
17923 case (and specifically the British style shows that
17924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17931 does not necessarily mean
17932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17940 This is why we call them
17941 \begin_inset Quotes els
17945 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17966 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668702
17967 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
17969 \begin_inset Quotes els
17973 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17977 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667343
17979 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667350
17980 can be obtained by means of
17985 arg "quote-insert single"
17989 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668731
17992 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17998 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667602
18002 \begin_layout Standard
18004 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668992
18005 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
18006 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
18007 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
18008 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
18009 If you check the setting
18011 Use dynamic quotation marks
18015 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18016 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18019 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
18020 they appear in a special color).
18021 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
18022 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
18024 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18027 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
18030 \begin_layout Standard
18032 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667904
18033 Individual quotation marks (i.
18034 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18037 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
18038 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
18044 \begin_layout Subsection
18046 \begin_inset Index idx
18049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18050 Typography ! Ligatures
18056 \begin_inset Index idx
18059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18088 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18090 name "subsec:Ligatures"
18097 \begin_layout Standard
18098 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
18099 print them as single characters.
18100 These groups are known as
18105 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
18106 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
18108 Here are the standard ligatures:
18111 \begin_layout Itemize
18115 \begin_layout Itemize
18119 \begin_layout Itemize
18123 \begin_layout Itemize
18127 \begin_layout Itemize
18131 \begin_layout Standard
18132 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
18135 \begin_layout Standard
18136 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
18137 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
18138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18145 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
18146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18161 To break a ligature, use
18163 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18164 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18166 \begin_inset space ~
18173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18181 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18184 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18186 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18201 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18209 \begin_layout Subsection
18211 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
18213 \change_deleted -712698321 1482669270
18215 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669270
18219 \begin_inset Index idx
18222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18230 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18232 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
18239 \begin_layout Standard
18242 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18243 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
18247 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
18250 \begin_layout Description
18252 The name of the game.
18255 \begin_layout Description
18257 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
18261 \begin_layout Description
18263 The \SpecialChar TeX
18264 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
18268 \begin_layout Description
18269 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
18270 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18274 \begin_layout Standard
18275 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18281 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
18285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18289 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
18290 world to give programs geek version numbers.
18291 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
18292 converges to the number
18293 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
18296 : The actual version is
18297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18305 , the previous one was
18306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18317 \begin_layout Subsection
18319 \begin_inset Index idx
18322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18331 \begin_layout Standard
18332 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
18333 space between two words.
18334 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
18337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18344 for units use the menu
18346 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18347 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18349 \begin_inset space ~
18357 arg "space-insert thin"
18363 \begin_layout Standard
18364 Here is an example to show the differences:
18367 \begin_layout Standard
18368 \begin_inset Tabular
18369 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
18370 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18371 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18372 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18379 \begin_inset space ~
18383 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18395 space between number and unit
18402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18407 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18411 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18423 half space between number and unit
18436 \begin_layout Subsection
18438 \begin_inset Index idx
18441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18442 Typography ! Widows and orphans
18450 \begin_layout Standard
18451 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
18453 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
18454 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
18455 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
18456 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
18457 These bits of text became known as
18468 \begin_layout Standard
18469 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
18470 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
18471 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
18472 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
18473 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
18474 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
18475 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
18476 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
18477 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
18478 \begin_inset Newline newline
18486 \begin_inset Newline newline
18494 \begin_inset Newline newline
18497 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18498 preamble of your document to avoid them.
18499 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
18501 \begin_inset space ~
18505 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18507 key "latexcompanion"
18512 \begin_inset space ~
18516 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18522 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18523 's page break mechanism.
18526 \begin_layout Chapter
18527 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
18528 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18530 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
18537 \begin_layout Standard
18538 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
18541 \begin_inset space ~
18547 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
18550 \begin_layout Section
18552 \begin_inset Index idx
18555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18562 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18571 \begin_layout Standard
18573 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
18576 \begin_layout Description
18579 \begin_inset space ~
18582 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
18583 \begin_inset Newline newline
18587 \begin_inset Note Note
18590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18591 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
18599 \begin_layout Description
18600 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
18601 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18602 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18605 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18606 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18608 \begin_inset space ~
18614 \begin_inset Newline newline
18618 \begin_inset Note Comment
18621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18622 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
18631 \begin_layout Description
18633 \begin_inset space ~
18636 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
18637 set in the document settings under
18639 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
18641 \begin_inset space ~
18647 \begin_inset Newline newline
18651 \begin_inset Newline newline
18655 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18664 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
18665 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
18670 of a comment that appears in the output.
18676 \begin_inset Newline newline
18680 \begin_inset Newline newline
18683 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
18686 \begin_layout Standard
18687 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
18695 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18699 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
18702 \begin_layout Section
18704 \begin_inset Index idx
18707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18714 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18716 name "sec:Footnotes"
18723 \begin_layout Standard
18725 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
18728 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18731 or the toolbar button
18734 arg "footnote-insert"
18746 \begin_inset Graphics
18747 filename clipart/footnote.png
18756 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18757 's representation of your footnote.
18767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18786 label, the box will
18790 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
18791 Clicking on the box label again will close
18804 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
18805 and click on the footnote
18820 \begin_layout Standard
18821 Here is an example footnote:
18829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18830 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
18838 \begin_layout Standard
18839 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
18840 position where the footnote box is placed.
18841 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
18842 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
18843 according to the document class.
18845 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
18846 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
18852 ey are described in the
18855 \begin_inset space ~
18863 \begin_layout Section
18865 \begin_inset Index idx
18868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18875 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18877 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
18884 \begin_layout Standard
18885 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
18887 When you insert a margin note via the menu
18889 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18891 \begin_inset space ~
18896 or the toolbar button
18899 arg "marginalnote-insert"
18918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18925 appearing within your text.
18926 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18927 's representation of your margin
18936 \begin_layout Standard
18937 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
18941 \begin_inset Marginal
18944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18946 This is a marginal note.
18954 \begin_layout Standard
18955 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
18956 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
18957 pages, right on odd pages.
18960 \begin_layout Standard
18961 For further information about marginal notes see the section
18964 \begin_inset space ~
18972 \begin_inset space ~
18980 \begin_layout Section
18981 Graphics and Images
18982 \begin_inset Index idx
18985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18992 \begin_inset Index idx
18995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19002 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19004 name "sec:Graphics"
19011 \begin_layout Standard
19012 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
19013 you want and click on the toolbar icon
19016 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
19021 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19025 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
19028 \begin_layout Standard
19029 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
19034 tab allows you to choose your image file.
19035 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
19037 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
19038 \begin_inset space ~
19042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19044 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
19051 \begin_layout Standard
19056 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
19057 of the image in the output.
19058 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
19062 \begin_inset space ~
19066 \begin_inset space ~
19075 \begin_inset space ~
19079 \begin_inset space ~
19083 \begin_inset space ~
19088 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
19089 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
19097 \begin_layout Standard
19101 \begin_inset space ~
19105 \begin_inset space ~
19110 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
19111 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
19113 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
19118 \begin_inset space ~
19123 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
19124 with the image size is printed.
19127 \begin_layout Standard
19128 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
19129 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
19131 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
19134 \begin_layout Standard
19136 \begin_inset Graphics
19137 filename clipart/mobius.eps
19145 \begin_layout Standard
19146 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
19147 the image into a float, see section
19148 \begin_inset space ~
19152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19154 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
19161 \begin_layout Subsection
19163 \begin_inset Index idx
19166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19173 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19175 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
19182 \begin_layout Standard
19183 You can insert images in any known file format.
19184 But as we explained in section
19185 \begin_inset space ~
19189 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19191 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19195 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
19197 therefore uses the program
19201 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
19202 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
19203 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
19204 \begin_inset space ~
19208 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19210 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19217 \begin_layout Standard
19218 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
19221 \begin_layout Description
19223 \begin_inset space ~
19226 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
19227 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
19228 Well-known bitmap image formats are
19229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19232 Graphics Interchange Format
19233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19236 (GIF, file extension
19237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19249 \begin_inset Index idx
19252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19284 Portable Network Graphics
19285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19288 (PNG, file extension
19289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19301 \begin_inset Index idx
19304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19336 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19340 (JPG, file extension
19341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19365 \begin_inset Index idx
19368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19399 \begin_layout Description
19401 \begin_inset space ~
19404 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
19406 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
19407 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
19408 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
19409 \begin_inset Newline newline
19412 Scalable image formats can be
19413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19416 Scalable Vector Graphics
19417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19420 (SVG, file extension
19421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19433 \begin_inset Index idx
19436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19468 Encapsulated PostScript
19469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19472 (EPS, file extension
19473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19485 \begin_inset Index idx
19488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19520 Portable Document Format
19521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19524 (PDF, file extension
19525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19537 \begin_inset Index idx
19540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19555 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
19556 result will not be scalable.
19557 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
19562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19563 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
19571 \begin_layout Standard
19572 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
19579 \begin_layout Subsection
19580 Grouping of Image Settings
19581 \begin_inset Index idx
19584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19585 Images ! Settings grouping
19593 \begin_layout Standard
19594 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
19596 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
19597 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
19599 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
19600 need to manually change each of them.
19604 \begin_layout Standard
19605 A new group can be set by pressing the button
19608 \begin_inset space ~
19612 \begin_inset space ~
19624 \begin_inset space ~
19628 \begin_inset space ~
19634 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
19635 and checking the name of the desired group.
19638 \begin_layout Section
19640 \begin_inset Index idx
19643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19650 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19659 \begin_layout Standard
19660 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
19663 arg "tabular-insert"
19668 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19672 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
19673 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
19674 from the rest of the table.
19675 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
19676 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
19678 Here is an example table:
19681 \begin_layout Standard
19683 \begin_inset Tabular
19684 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
19685 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19686 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19687 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19688 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19689 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19889 \begin_layout Subsection
19893 \begin_layout Standard
19894 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
19897 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
19901 This brings up the table dialog.
19902 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
19903 cursor is placed currently.
19904 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
19905 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
19906 done on all of your selection.
19909 \begin_layout Standard
19910 In addition to the table dialog, the
19913 \begin_inset space ~
19918 helps you in setting table properties.
19919 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
19922 \begin_layout Standard
19926 \begin_inset space ~
19931 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
19932 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
19933 current cell respectively.
19934 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
19936 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
19937 of text, see section
19938 \begin_inset space ~
19942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19944 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
19951 \begin_layout Standard
19952 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
19953 using the check box
19962 This will merge the cells to
19966 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
19967 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
19968 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
19969 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
19970 in the last row without the upper border:
19973 \begin_layout Standard
19975 \begin_inset Tabular
19976 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
19977 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
19978 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19979 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
19980 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19981 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19992 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20001 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20077 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20112 \begin_layout Standard
20113 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20114 -arguments for the table.
20115 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
20116 explained in the chapter
20123 \begin_inset space ~
20129 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
20130 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
20131 but are visible in the output.
20134 \begin_layout Standard
20135 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20143 Most DVI-viewers are
20147 able to display rotations.
20155 \begin_layout Standard
20160 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
20165 adds lines for all cell borders.
20168 \begin_layout Subsection
20170 \begin_inset Index idx
20173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20174 Tables ! Multi-page
20180 \begin_inset Index idx
20183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20192 \begin_layout Standard
20193 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
20196 \begin_inset space ~
20200 \begin_inset space ~
20208 \begin_inset space ~
20213 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
20214 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
20217 \begin_layout Description
20222 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20223 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
20224 Except for the first page, if
20227 \begin_inset space ~
20235 \begin_layout Description
20239 \begin_inset space ~
20244 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20245 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
20248 \begin_layout Description
20253 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20254 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
20255 except for the last page, if
20258 \begin_inset space ~
20266 \begin_layout Description
20270 \begin_inset space ~
20275 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20276 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
20279 \begin_layout Description
20280 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
20281 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
20283 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20287 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
20290 \begin_inset space ~
20298 \begin_layout Standard
20299 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
20300 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
20301 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
20307 In this context, first means first in this order:
20310 \begin_inset space ~
20322 \begin_inset space ~
20327 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
20330 \begin_layout Standard
20332 \begin_inset Tabular
20333 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
20334 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
20335 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
20336 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20337 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20338 <row endfirsthead="true">
20339 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20345 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
20350 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20359 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20369 <row endfirsthead="true">
20370 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20381 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20390 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20402 <row endhead="true">
20403 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20414 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20423 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20433 <row endhead="true">
20434 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20445 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20454 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20466 <row endfoot="true">
20467 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20478 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20487 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20518 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21459 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21468 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21477 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21488 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21519 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21550 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21581 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21612 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21643 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21674 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21705 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21736 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21767 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21798 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21829 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21860 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21891 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21922 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21953 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21984 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22015 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22046 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22077 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22108 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22139 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22170 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22201 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22232 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22263 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22294 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22325 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22356 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22387 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22418 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22448 <row endlastfoot="true">
22449 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22460 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22469 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22486 \begin_layout Subsection
22488 \begin_inset Index idx
22491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22498 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22500 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
22507 \begin_layout Standard
22508 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
22509 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
22510 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
22511 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
22515 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
22518 \begin_layout Standard
22519 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
22520 for the column in the table dialog.
22521 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
22522 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
22526 \begin_layout Standard
22528 \begin_inset Tabular
22529 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
22530 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22531 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22532 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
22533 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22553 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22622 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22678 This is longer now.
22683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22734 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22735 This is longer now.
22740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22766 \begin_layout Standard
22767 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
22768 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
22772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22773 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
22774 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
22780 Selection with the mouse or with
22784 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
22785 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
22786 the selection from outside the table.
22789 \begin_layout Section
22791 \begin_inset Index idx
22794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22801 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22810 \begin_layout Subsection
22814 \begin_layout Standard
22815 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
22816 have a fixed location.
22818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22825 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
22833 \begin_inset space ~
22838 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
22839 too many notes on the current page.
22842 \begin_layout Standard
22843 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
22844 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
22845 and pages without text.
22846 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
22847 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
22848 Floats are therefore numbered.
22849 Referencing is described in section
22850 \begin_inset space ~
22854 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22856 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22863 \begin_layout Standard
22864 To insert a float, use the menu
22866 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22870 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
22871 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
22873 After the label you can insert the caption text.
22874 \begin_inset Index idx
22877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22883 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
22884 paragraph within the float.
22885 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
22886 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
22887 left-clicking on the box label.
22888 A closed float box looks like this:
22889 \begin_inset Graphics
22890 filename clipart/float.png
22895 – a gray button with a red label.
22898 \begin_layout Standard
22899 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
22901 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
22904 \begin_layout Subsection
22906 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22908 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22913 \begin_inset Index idx
22916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22917 Floats ! Figure floats
22925 \begin_layout Standard
22927 \begin_inset space ~
22931 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22933 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22937 was created using the menu
22939 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22940 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22946 arg "float-insert figure"
22950 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
22953 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22959 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22963 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
22964 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
22966 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
22968 \begin_inset space ~
22976 arg "layout-paragraph"
22982 \begin_layout Standard
22983 \begin_inset Float figure
22988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22990 \begin_inset Graphics
22991 filename clipart/platypus.eps
23000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23001 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23004 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23006 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
23010 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
23023 \begin_layout Standard
23024 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
23025 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
23027 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23036 ) and refer to it using the menu
23038 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23044 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
23048 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
23049 vague references like
23050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23057 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
23058 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
23060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23068 For more about cross-references, see section
23069 \begin_inset space ~
23073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23075 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23082 \begin_layout Standard
23083 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
23084 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
23085 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
23086 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
23087 as described in section
23088 \begin_inset space ~
23092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23094 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
23100 \begin_inset space ~
23104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23106 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
23110 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
23111 You can also set the images one below the other.
23113 \begin_inset space ~
23117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23119 reference "fig:Undefinable"
23124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23126 reference "fig:Platypus"
23130 are the subfigures.
23133 \begin_layout Standard
23134 \begin_inset Float figure
23139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23140 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23144 \begin_inset Float figure
23149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23150 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23153 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23155 name "fig:Undefinable"
23167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23168 \begin_inset Graphics
23169 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
23180 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23184 \begin_inset Float figure
23189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23190 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23193 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23195 name "fig:Platypus"
23207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23208 \begin_inset Graphics
23209 filename clipart/platypus.eps
23221 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23228 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23231 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23233 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
23237 Two distorted images.
23250 \begin_layout Subsection
23252 \begin_inset Index idx
23255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23256 Floats ! Table floats
23264 \begin_layout Standard
23265 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
23267 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23268 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23271 or the toolbar button
23274 arg "float-insert table"
23278 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
23279 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
23280 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
23282 \begin_inset space ~
23286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23288 reference "tab:Table-float"
23295 \begin_layout Standard
23296 \begin_inset Float table
23301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23302 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23305 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23307 name "tab:Table-float"
23319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23321 \begin_inset Tabular
23322 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
23323 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23324 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23325 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23326 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23453 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
23461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23474 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23477 \end{array}\right]$
23485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23498 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
23519 \begin_layout Subsection
23521 \begin_inset Index idx
23524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23533 \begin_layout Standard
23535 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
23536 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
23537 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
23539 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
23547 \begin_inset space ~
23555 \begin_layout Section
23557 \begin_inset Index idx
23560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23569 \begin_layout Standard
23571 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
23573 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
23574 \begin_inset space \space{}
23581 \begin_layout Standard
23582 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
23583 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
23585 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23589 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
23590 and its alignment within the page.
23593 \begin_layout Standard
23595 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23605 height_special "totalheight"
23610 backgroundcolor "none"
23613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23616 This is a minipage.
23617 The text is set in an italic style.
23620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23623 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
23624 another formatting.
23632 \begin_layout Standard
23633 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23636 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
23640 as described in section
23641 \begin_inset space ~
23645 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23647 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
23652 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23658 \begin_layout Standard
23659 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23669 height_special "totalheight"
23674 backgroundcolor "none"
23677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23678 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23679 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23685 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23689 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23699 height_special "totalheight"
23704 backgroundcolor "none"
23707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23708 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23709 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23717 \begin_layout Standard
23718 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23724 \begin_layout Standard
23725 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
23727 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
23734 \begin_inset space ~
23742 \begin_layout Chapter
23743 Mathematical Formulas
23744 \begin_inset Index idx
23747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23754 \begin_inset Index idx
23757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23786 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23788 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
23795 \begin_layout Standard
23796 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
23801 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
23804 \begin_layout Section
23806 \begin_inset Index idx
23809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23818 \begin_layout Standard
23819 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
23832 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
23834 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
23835 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
23836 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
23838 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23844 \begin_layout Standard
23845 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
23849 \begin_inset space ~
23854 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
23857 \begin_layout Standard
23858 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
23859 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
23862 \begin_layout Standard
23863 This is a line with an inline formula
23864 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
23870 \begin_layout Standard
23871 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
23872 paragraph, like this one:
23873 \begin_inset Formula
23880 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
23883 \begin_layout Standard
23885 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
23887 For example, typing
23888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23901 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
23902 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
23906 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
23909 \begin_inset space ~
23917 \begin_layout Subsection
23918 Navigating in Formulas
23919 \begin_inset Index idx
23922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23931 \begin_layout Standard
23932 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
23933 achieved with the arrow keys.
23935 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
23936 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
23941 will leave a formula construct (a square root
23942 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
23946 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
23950 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23953 \end{array}\right]$
23961 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
23966 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
23967 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
23970 \begin_layout Standard
23975 , printed in this document as
23976 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23980 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23987 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
23988 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
23989 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
23994 For example, if you want
23995 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
24003 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24013 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24017 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24022 , since in the latter case only the
24025 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
24030 will be under the square root sign:
24031 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
24037 \begin_layout Standard
24038 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
24040 \begin_inset Formula
24042 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24051 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
24052 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
24055 \begin_layout Subsection
24059 \begin_layout Standard
24060 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
24061 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
24065 and a cursor movement key to select text.
24066 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
24067 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
24068 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
24069 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
24073 \begin_layout Subsection
24074 Exponents and Subscripts
24075 \begin_inset Index idx
24078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24085 \begin_inset Index idx
24088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24097 \begin_layout Standard
24098 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
24101 arg "math-superscript"
24107 arg "math-subscript"
24110 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
24112 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
24115 , type in a formula
24118 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24128 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
24134 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
24138 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
24144 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24150 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
24152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24159 , you have to use an extra
24163 to separate the circumflex and the character.
24164 For example, if you want
24165 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
24171 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24177 Subscripts are similar: To get
24178 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
24184 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24192 \begin_layout Subsection
24194 \begin_inset Index idx
24197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24206 \begin_layout Standard
24207 Create a fraction either with the command
24213 or by using the icon
24216 arg "math-insert \\frac"
24222 \begin_inset space ~
24228 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
24229 The cursor is above the fraction line.
24230 To move it to the bottom, simply press
24235 To move back up, press
24240 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
24241 \begin_inset Formula
24243 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
24246 \end{array}\right)}\right]
24254 \begin_layout Subsection
24256 \begin_inset Index idx
24259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24268 \begin_layout Standard
24269 Roots can be created using the
24272 \begin_inset space ~
24280 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
24286 arg "math-insert \\root"
24308 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
24314 always produces a square root.
24317 \begin_layout Subsection
24318 Operators with Limits
24319 \begin_inset Index idx
24322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24329 \begin_inset Index idx
24332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24339 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24341 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24348 \begin_layout Standard
24350 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
24354 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
24357 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
24358 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24359 by entering them as you would enter a super-
24360 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
24361 The sum operator will automatically place its
24362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24369 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
24371 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
24375 \begin_inset Formula
24377 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
24382 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
24386 \begin_layout Standard
24387 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
24389 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
24390 behind the operator and using the menu
24392 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24393 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24395 \begin_inset space ~
24399 \begin_inset space ~
24413 \begin_layout Standard
24414 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
24415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24423 \begin_inset Index idx
24426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24433 \begin_inset Formula
24435 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
24440 which will place the
24441 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
24445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24453 In inline formulas it looks like this:
24454 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
24460 \begin_layout Standard
24461 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
24468 Have a look at section
24469 \begin_inset space ~
24473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24475 reference "subsec:Functions"
24479 for an explanation of function macros.
24482 \begin_layout Subsection
24484 \begin_inset Index idx
24487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24496 \begin_layout Standard
24497 Most math symbols can be found in the
24500 \begin_inset space ~
24505 under one of several categories; including
24522 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
24526 \begin_layout Standard
24527 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24528 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
24529 don't have to use the
24532 \begin_inset space ~
24537 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
24539 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
24542 \begin_layout Subsection
24544 \begin_inset Index idx
24547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24556 \begin_layout Standard
24557 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
24563 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
24569 \begin_inset space ~
24577 arg "math-insert \\space"
24581 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
24582 For example, the sequence
24587 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
24590 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24592 \begin_inset Graphics
24593 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
24598 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
24599 the space marker and enter space again several times.
24600 With every space enter the size will be changed.
24601 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
24602 , because they are negative
24604 Here are two examples:
24607 \begin_layout Standard
24617 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
24623 \begin_layout Standard
24633 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
24639 \begin_layout Subsection
24641 \begin_inset Index idx
24644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24651 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24653 name "subsec:Functions"
24660 \begin_layout Standard
24664 \begin_inset space ~
24669 contains under the button
24672 arg "math-insert \\functions"
24675 a number of function macros, such as
24676 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
24680 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
24688 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
24695 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
24696 avoid confusions, because
24697 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
24701 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
24707 \begin_layout Standard
24708 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
24710 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
24714 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
24720 \begin_layout Standard
24721 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
24722 are placed, as described in section
24723 \begin_inset space ~
24727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24729 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24736 \begin_layout Subsection
24738 \begin_inset Index idx
24741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24750 \begin_layout Standard
24751 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
24753 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
24754 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
24755 commands, for example, to enter
24756 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24759 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
24760 Our example is entered by typing
24765 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24772 \begin_inset space ~
24776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24778 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
24782 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
24785 \begin_layout Standard
24786 \begin_inset Float table
24791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24792 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24795 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24797 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
24801 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
24809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24811 \begin_inset Tabular
24812 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
24813 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24814 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24815 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24816 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24900 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24954 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
24964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25008 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
25018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25062 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
25072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25116 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
25126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25170 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
25180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25224 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
25234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25278 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
25288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25332 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
25342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25377 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
25398 \begin_layout Standard
25399 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
25402 \begin_inset space ~
25410 arg "math-insert \\hat"
25413 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
25417 \begin_layout Section
25418 Brackets and Delimiters
25419 \begin_inset Index idx
25422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25429 \begin_inset Index idx
25432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25439 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25441 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25448 \begin_layout Standard
25449 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
25451 For some purposes, using just the keys
25456 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
25457 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
25458 toolbar delimiter icon
25461 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25465 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
25466 \begin_inset Formula
25468 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
25476 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
25477 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
25481 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25484 and the expression on the right was entered using the
25490 \begin_inset Formula
25492 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
25500 \begin_layout Standard
25501 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
25502 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
25506 \begin_layout Standard
25507 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
25508 left side and right side.
25509 If you use the option
25512 \begin_inset space ~
25517 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
25518 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
25520 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
25525 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
25526 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
25529 \begin_layout Standard
25530 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
25531 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
25532 is to go inside the brackets.
25533 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
25538 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
25539 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
25540 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
25544 arg "math-delim ( )"
25550 \begin_layout Section
25551 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
25552 \begin_inset Index idx
25555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25562 \begin_inset Index idx
25565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25572 \begin_inset Index idx
25575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25576 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25584 \begin_layout Standard
25585 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25589 \begin_inset space ~
25597 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
25601 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
25602 Here is an example:
25603 \begin_inset Formula
25605 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25614 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
25615 \begin_inset space ~
25619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25621 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25626 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
25627 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
25628 This alignment is set in the box
25633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25682 for every column as default.
25683 For example, the sequence
25684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25695 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
25696 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
25697 corresponds to the relevant column.
25698 The result will look like this:
25699 \begin_inset Formula
25702 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
25703 column & has & has\,right\\
25704 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
25713 \begin_layout Standard
25714 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
25717 arg "newline-insert newline"
25720 while the cursor is in the matrix.
25721 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
25723 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25726 or the math toolbar.
25729 \begin_layout Standard
25730 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
25731 It can be created with the menu
25733 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25734 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25736 \begin_inset space ~
25748 Here is an example:
25749 \begin_inset Formula
25763 \begin_layout Standard
25764 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25767 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
25770 arg "newline-insert newline"
25774 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
25779 arg "newline-insert newline"
25782 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
25783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25790 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
25791 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
25792 A new row is created by every further entry of
25795 arg "newline-insert newline"
25799 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
25800 Here is an example:
25801 \begin_inset Formula
25803 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
25804 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
25809 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
25810 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
25811 \begin_inset Formula
25813 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
25821 \begin_layout Standard
25822 The multi-line formula type described here is called
25829 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
25830 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
25831 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25833 reference "eq:asquared"
25838 The other types are described in section
25839 \begin_inset space ~
25843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25845 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25852 \begin_layout Section
25853 Formula Numbering and Referencing
25854 \begin_inset Index idx
25857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25858 Math ! Formula numbering
25864 \begin_inset Index idx
25867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25868 Math ! Referencing formulas
25874 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25876 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
25883 \begin_layout Standard
25884 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
25886 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25887 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25889 \begin_inset space ~
25893 \begin_inset space ~
25901 arg "math-number-toggle"
25905 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25906 within parentheses.
25907 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
25908 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
25909 the document class.
25910 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
25911 separated by a dot:
25912 \begin_inset Formula
25922 arg "math-number-toggle"
25925 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
25926 You can only number displayed formulas.
25929 \begin_layout Standard
25930 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
25932 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25933 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25935 \begin_inset space ~
25939 \begin_inset space ~
25947 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
25950 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
25951 \begin_inset Formula
25954 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
25960 To number all lines use the shortcut
25963 arg "math-number-toggle"
25969 \begin_layout Standard
25970 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25973 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
25974 A label is inserted with the menu
25976 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25985 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
25986 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
25987 It is recommended that you use the suggested
25988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25999 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
26000 label type when you have many labels in your document.
26001 We inserted in the following example the label
26002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26009 in the second line:
26010 \begin_inset Formula
26012 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
26013 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
26018 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
26019 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
26020 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
26022 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26024 \begin_inset space ~
26032 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26036 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
26037 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26038 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
26039 as the formula number:
26042 \begin_layout Standard
26043 This is a cross-reference to equation (
26044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26046 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26053 \begin_layout Standard
26054 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
26055 's cross-reference box are described in section
26056 \begin_inset space ~
26060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26062 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26067 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
26075 \begin_layout Section
26076 User defined math macros
26077 \begin_inset Index idx
26080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26089 \begin_layout Standard
26091 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
26092 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
26093 Math macros are explained in section
26096 \begin_inset space ~
26108 \begin_layout Section
26112 \begin_layout Subsection
26114 \begin_inset Index idx
26117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26126 \begin_layout Standard
26127 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
26128 To set a font in a formula, use the
26131 \begin_inset space ~
26139 arg "math-insert \\font"
26142 , or enter its command, listed in table
26143 \begin_inset space ~
26147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26149 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26156 \begin_layout Standard
26157 \begin_inset Float table
26162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26163 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26166 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26168 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26172 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
26180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26182 \begin_inset Tabular
26183 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
26184 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26185 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26186 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26218 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
26226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26245 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
26253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26272 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
26280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26305 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
26313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26332 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
26340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26359 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
26367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26393 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
26401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26420 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
26428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26454 \begin_layout Standard
26455 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26463 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
26479 \begin_layout Standard
26480 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
26481 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
26486 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
26487 space when you need a space in the box.
26488 Here is an example where
26489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26500 denotes the set of numbers:
26501 \begin_inset Formula
26503 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
26511 \begin_layout Standard
26512 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
26513 You can, for example, put a character in
26522 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
26526 \begin_inset Newline newline
26529 So it is better not to use this feature.
26532 \begin_layout Standard
26533 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
26534 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
26538 \begin_inset Newline newline
26541 You can only print them emboldened using the command
26547 , which works like the other typeface commands:
26548 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
26554 \begin_layout Standard
26561 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
26564 \begin_layout Standard
26565 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
26567 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26568 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26570 \begin_inset space ~
26578 \begin_layout Subsection
26580 \begin_inset Index idx
26583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26592 \begin_layout Standard
26593 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
26595 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
26599 \begin_inset space ~
26603 \begin_inset space ~
26611 \begin_inset space ~
26619 arg "math-insert \\font"
26623 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26624 in black instead of blue.
26625 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
26626 Here is an example:
26627 \begin_inset Formula
26630 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
26631 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
26640 \begin_layout Subsection
26642 \begin_inset Index idx
26645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26654 \begin_layout Standard
26655 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
26656 automatically chosen in most situations.
26674 For most characters,
26682 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
26683 and certain other structures, are set larger in
26688 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
26689 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
26690 thinks are appropriate.
26691 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
26694 arg "math-insert \\style"
26698 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
26699 For example, you can set
26700 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
26703 , which is normally in
26712 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
26716 The four styles are used in the following example:
26719 \begin_layout Standard
26720 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
26724 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
26728 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
26732 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
26738 \begin_layout Standard
26739 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
26740 is set in a particular size with the menu
26742 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26744 \begin_inset space ~
26749 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
26750 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
26751 will be adjusted to correspond.
26752 As an example here is a formula in the font size
26753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26763 \begin_layout Standard
26767 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
26773 \begin_layout Section
26774 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26776 \begin_inset Index idx
26779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26786 \begin_inset Index idx
26789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26798 \begin_layout Standard
26800 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
26801 that are in common use.
26804 \begin_layout Subsection
26805 Enabling AMS-Support
26808 \begin_layout Standard
26809 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
26810 the document by selecting the checkbox
26813 \begin_inset space ~
26817 \begin_inset space ~
26821 \begin_inset space ~
26828 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26832 \begin_inset Index idx
26835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26836 Document ! Settings
26844 \begin_inset space ~
26850 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26851 -errors in formulas,
26852 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
26855 \begin_layout Subsection
26857 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26859 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26864 \begin_inset Index idx
26867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26868 Math ! Multi-line Equations
26876 \begin_layout Standard
26877 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26878 provides a selection of different formula types.
26880 allows you to choose between
26901 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
26902 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26908 , for an explanation of these formula types.
26911 \begin_layout Chapter
26915 \begin_layout Section
26917 \begin_inset Index idx
26920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26927 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26929 name "sec:Cross-References"
26936 \begin_layout Standard
26937 One of \SpecialChar LyX
26938 's strengths is cross-references.
26939 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
26941 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
26942 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
26943 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
26946 \begin_layout Enumerate
26950 \begin_layout Enumerate
26951 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26953 name "enu:Second-item"
26960 \begin_layout Enumerate
26964 \begin_layout Standard
26965 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
26967 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26970 or by pressing the toolbar button
26977 A gray label box like this:
26978 \begin_inset Graphics
26979 filename clipart/label.png
26983 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
26985 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
26987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27012 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27020 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
27021 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
27023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27037 \begin_layout Standard
27038 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
27040 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27043 or the toolbar button
27046 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27050 A gray cross-reference box like this:
27051 \begin_inset Graphics
27052 filename clipart/reference.png
27056 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
27058 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
27059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27071 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
27075 \begin_layout Standard
27076 As an alternative to
27078 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27081 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
27086 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
27087 to the actual cursor position via the menu
27089 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27101 \begin_layout Standard
27102 Here is our cross-reference: Item
27103 \begin_inset space ~
27107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27109 reference "enu:Second-item"
27116 \begin_layout Standard
27117 It is recommended to use a protected space
27121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27122 described in section
27123 \begin_inset space ~
27127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27129 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
27138 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
27139 line breaks between them.
27142 \begin_layout Standard
27143 There are six formats of cross-references:
27146 \begin_layout Description
27147 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
27148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27150 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27157 \begin_layout Description
27158 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
27159 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
27161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27169 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27171 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27178 \begin_layout Description
27179 <page>: prints the page number: Page
27180 \begin_inset space ~
27184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27185 LatexCommand pageref
27186 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27193 \begin_layout Description
27195 \begin_inset space ~
27199 \begin_inset space ~
27202 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
27203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27204 LatexCommand vpageref
27205 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27210 \begin_inset Newline newline
27213 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
27214 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
27215 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
27216 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
27217 it prints “on the next page”.
27218 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
27221 \begin_layout Description
27223 \begin_inset space ~
27227 \begin_inset space ~
27231 \begin_inset space ~
27234 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
27235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27237 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27242 \begin_inset Newline newline
27245 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
27251 ; otherwise it behaves like
27255 \begin_inset space ~
27259 \begin_inset space ~
27268 \begin_layout Description
27270 \begin_inset space ~
27273 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
27274 \begin_inset Newline newline
27278 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27286 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27296 \begin_inset Index idx
27299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27301 -packages ! prettyref
27307 \begin_inset Index idx
27310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27312 -packages ! refstyle
27323 \begin_inset Newline newline
27326 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
27327 -package should be used for this feature by setting
27330 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
27334 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27335 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27343 is the default and preferred because
27347 supports only English documents.
27348 The format is specified by using the command
27360 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27361 preamble of the document.
27362 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
27364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27375 ) can be done with this command
27376 \begin_inset Newline newline
27383 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
27388 \begin_inset Newline newline
27391 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
27393 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27395 key "prettyref,refstyle"
27402 \begin_layout Description
27404 \begin_inset space ~
27407 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
27408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27409 LatexCommand nameref
27410 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27417 \begin_layout Standard
27418 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
27419 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
27421 The varieties are adjusted in the field
27425 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
27429 \begin_layout Standard
27430 You can only use the style
27434 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
27438 is always possible.
27441 \begin_layout Standard
27442 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
27443 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
27445 Referencing formulas is explained in section
27446 \begin_inset space ~
27450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27452 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27459 \begin_layout Standard
27460 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
27464 \begin_inset space ~
27468 \begin_inset space ~
27473 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
27474 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
27477 \begin_inset space ~
27482 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
27483 You can also go back with the toolbar button
27486 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
27492 \begin_layout Standard
27493 You can change labels at any time.
27494 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
27495 do not need to think about this.
27498 \begin_layout Standard
27499 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
27501 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
27505 \begin_layout Standard
27506 References are described in detail in the section
27507 \begin_inset space ~
27517 \begin_inset space ~
27525 \begin_layout Section
27526 Table of Contents and other Listings
27527 \begin_inset Index idx
27530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27537 \begin_inset Index idx
27540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27541 Navigating ! Outline
27547 \begin_inset Index idx
27550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27557 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27566 \begin_layout Subsection
27568 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27570 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
27577 \begin_layout Standard
27578 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
27580 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27581 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27583 \begin_inset space ~
27587 \begin_inset space ~
27593 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
27595 If you click on it, the
27599 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
27600 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
27601 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
27603 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
27605 \begin_inset space ~
27610 that is described in section
27611 \begin_inset space ~
27615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27617 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
27624 \begin_layout Standard
27625 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
27626 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
27628 \begin_inset space ~
27632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27634 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
27638 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
27640 \begin_inset space ~
27644 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27646 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
27650 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
27652 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
27655 \begin_layout Subsection
27656 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
27657 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27659 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
27666 \begin_layout Standard
27667 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
27669 You can insert them via the
27671 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27675 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
27678 \begin_layout Section
27679 URLs and Hyperlinks
27680 \begin_inset Index idx
27683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27690 \begin_inset Index idx
27693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27702 \begin_layout Subsection
27704 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27713 \begin_layout Standard
27714 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
27716 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27722 \begin_layout Standard
27723 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
27725 \begin_inset Flex URL
27728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27738 \begin_layout Standard
27739 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
27745 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
27749 \begin_layout Standard
27750 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27758 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27767 \begin_layout Subsection
27769 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27771 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
27778 \begin_layout Standard
27779 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
27781 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27784 or with the toolbar button
27791 The appearing dialog has two fields:
27800 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
27801 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
27802 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27804 name "LyX's homepage"
27805 target "http://www.lyx.org"
27809 , an Email address like this:
27810 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27812 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
27813 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
27818 , or a link to a file.
27821 \begin_layout Standard
27822 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
27824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27835 to the link target.
27838 \begin_layout Standard
27839 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
27840 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
27841 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
27842 the text style dialog.
27843 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
27847 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27849 name "LyX's homepage"
27850 target "http://www.lyx.org"
27857 \begin_layout Standard
27858 The link text color can be changed, when the option
27862 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
27864 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27865 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27869 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
27871 \begin_inset Newline newline
27879 \begin_inset Newline newline
27886 in the PDF Properties dialog.
27889 \begin_layout Section
27891 \begin_inset Index idx
27894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27901 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27903 name "sec:Appendices"
27910 \begin_layout Standard
27911 Appendices are created with the menu
27913 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27915 \begin_inset space ~
27919 \begin_inset space ~
27925 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
27926 as the appendix part of the book.
27927 This part is marked with a red borderline.
27930 \begin_layout Standard
27931 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
27932 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
27933 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
27934 and the subsection number.
27935 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
27939 \begin_layout Standard
27941 \begin_inset space ~
27945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27947 reference "chap:Credits"
27952 \begin_inset space ~
27956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27958 reference "subsec:Export"
27965 \begin_layout Section
27967 \begin_inset Index idx
27970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27977 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27979 name "sec:Bibliography"
27986 \begin_layout Standard
27987 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
27989 You can include a bibliography database,
27993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27994 Known under the name
27995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27998 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28008 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
28009 manually, using the paragraph environment
28013 , which was described in section
28014 \begin_inset space ~
28018 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28020 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
28025 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
28026 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
28030 use a bibliography database.
28033 \begin_layout Subsection
28034 The Bibliography Environment
28037 \begin_layout Standard
28042 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
28044 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
28053 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
28055 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
28058 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28065 , a short form of its title, as the key.
28068 \begin_layout Standard
28069 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
28071 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28074 or the toolbar button
28077 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
28081 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
28082 containing the available citations.
28083 Select one or more keys from the list and
28093 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
28094 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
28098 \begin_layout Standard
28099 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
28100 entry with surrounding brackets.
28105 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
28106 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
28108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28118 \begin_layout Standard
28122 Companion Second Edition
28125 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28127 key "latexcompanion"
28134 \begin_layout Standard
28135 The \SpecialChar LyX
28136 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
28137 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28146 \begin_layout Standard
28147 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
28150 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28152 \begin_inset space ~
28160 arg "layout-paragraph"
28164 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
28167 \begin_layout Subsection
28168 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28170 \begin_inset Index idx
28173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28174 Bibliography ! Databases
28180 \begin_inset Index idx
28183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28184 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28191 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28193 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28200 \begin_layout Standard
28201 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
28206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28207 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
28209 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
28210 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
28215 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
28217 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
28218 your working field in a database.
28219 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
28220 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
28221 list for that document.
28222 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
28226 \begin_layout Standard
28227 The database is a text file with the file extension
28228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28239 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
28240 The format is explained in
28241 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28247 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28249 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28251 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
28256 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
28257 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
28258 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
28260 \begin_inset Flex URL
28263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28265 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
28273 \begin_layout Standard
28274 To use a database, use the menu
28276 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28281 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28283 \begin_inset space ~
28289 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
28290 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
28297 Add bibliography to TOC
28299 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
28304 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
28305 in the document or just the cited references.
28308 \begin_layout Standard
28309 The style file is a text file with the file extension
28310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28321 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
28322 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28323 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
28324 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
28326 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
28331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28332 For information on how this is done, have a look at
28333 \begin_inset Newline newline
28337 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28339 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
28351 \begin_layout Standard
28352 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
28355 \begin_layout Standard
28356 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
28357 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28359 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
28366 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28367 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28372 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
28373 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
28374 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
28378 The following variants are possible:
28381 \begin_layout Description
28382 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
28383 with other bibliography packages (e.
28384 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28388 \begin_inset space \space{}
28395 ), only with the package
28399 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
28403 \begin_layout Description
28404 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
28405 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
28406 with all bibliography packages, except
28411 \begin_layout Description
28412 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
28417 , works with all bibliography packages
28420 \begin_layout Standard
28421 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28422 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
28424 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
28427 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28431 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28440 \begin_layout Standard
28441 When you select the option
28443 Sectioned bibliography
28447 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28448 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28451 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
28452 This and other options are explained in detail in section
28454 Customizing Bibliographies
28458 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28463 Additional Features
28468 \begin_layout Standard
28469 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
28470 the two methods of creating them.
28471 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28472 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28473 We used the style file
28477 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
28480 \begin_layout Subsection
28482 \begin_inset Index idx
28485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28486 Bibliography ! Citation format
28494 \begin_layout Standard
28495 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
28496 For this feature you need to enable the option
28502 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28506 \begin_inset Index idx
28509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28510 Document ! Settings
28520 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
28521 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28522 style files as explained in
28523 the previous section.
28526 \begin_layout Standard
28527 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
28528 the citation reference window.
28529 Here is an example where the text
28530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28534 \begin_inset space ~
28538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28541 appears after the reference:
28544 \begin_layout Standard
28546 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28549 key "latexcompanion"
28556 \begin_layout Section
28558 \begin_inset Index idx
28561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28568 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28577 \begin_layout Standard
28578 An index entry is created if you use the menu
28580 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28582 \begin_inset space ~
28587 or the toolbar button
28594 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
28595 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
28596 by \SpecialChar LyX
28597 as the index entry.
28600 \begin_layout Standard
28601 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
28603 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28604 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28606 \begin_inset space ~
28612 A light blue box labeled
28613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28624 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
28625 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
28629 \begin_layout Standard
28630 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
28631 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
28632 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
28633 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28635 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28637 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
28644 \begin_layout Subsection
28645 Grouping Index Entries
28646 \begin_inset Index idx
28649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28658 \begin_layout Standard
28659 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
28661 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
28662 lists under the entry
28663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28671 First we create the entry
28672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28680 \begin_inset space ~
28684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28686 reference "subsec:Lists"
28691 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
28692 \begin_inset space ~
28696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28698 reference "sec:Itemize"
28702 , we insert the command
28705 \begin_layout Standard
28711 \begin_layout Standard
28715 \begin_layout Standard
28721 \begin_layout Standard
28722 for the enumerated list in section
28723 \begin_inset space ~
28727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28729 reference "sec:Enumerate"
28736 \begin_layout Standard
28737 The exclamation mark
28738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28745 marks the grouping levels.
28746 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
28747 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
28748 If we don't have an index entry for
28749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28756 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
28759 \begin_layout Subsection
28761 \begin_inset Index idx
28764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28765 Index ! Page ranges
28773 \begin_layout Standard
28774 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
28776 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
28777 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
28778 an index entry in section
28779 \begin_inset space ~
28783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28785 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
28792 \begin_layout Standard
28795 Paragraph environments|(
28798 \begin_layout Standard
28799 and another entry at the end of section
28800 \begin_inset space ~
28804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28806 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
28813 \begin_layout Standard
28816 Paragraph environments|)
28819 \begin_layout Standard
28821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28844 respectively start and end the index range.
28845 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
28846 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
28847 the pages of the indexed document parts.
28848 An example is the index entry
28849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28852 Document ! Settings
28853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28859 \begin_layout Subsection
28861 \begin_inset Index idx
28864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28865 Index ! Cross referencing
28873 \begin_layout Standard
28874 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
28875 We referred for example in the index entry
28876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28884 \begin_inset space ~
28888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28890 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
28894 ) to the index entry
28895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28902 in the same section using the entry
28905 \begin_layout Standard
28908 GIF|see{Image formats}
28911 \begin_layout Standard
28912 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
28914 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
28915 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
28918 \begin_layout Subsection
28920 \begin_inset Index idx
28923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28924 Index ! Entry order
28932 \begin_layout Standard
28933 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
28934 follow the rules for the index order.
28935 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
28940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28941 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
28943 \begin_inset space ~
28947 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28949 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28958 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
28959 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
28960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28968 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28972 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28976 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28980 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28984 \begin_inset Index idx
28987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28988 Dummy entries ! maïs
28994 \begin_inset Index idx
28997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28998 Dummy entries ! maître
29004 \begin_inset Index idx
29007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29008 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
29013 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
29014 maïs, maison, maître.
29015 To achieve this, we use the command
29018 \begin_layout Standard
29021 previous entry@current entry
29024 \begin_layout Standard
29025 In our case we want to have
29026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29041 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
29044 \begin_layout Standard
29050 \begin_layout Standard
29051 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
29052 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
29054 See the next subsection for an example.
29057 \begin_layout Standard
29058 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29064 \begin_layout Standard
29065 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
29070 to generate the index (see section
29071 \begin_inset space ~
29075 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29077 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
29086 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29087 -package aeguill in section
29088 \begin_inset space ~
29092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29094 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
29098 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
29099 -packages although all these index
29100 commands start with
29101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29114 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
29119 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
29122 \begin_layout Standard
29134 \begin_layout Standard
29146 \begin_layout Subsection
29148 \begin_inset Index idx
29151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29152 Index ! Entry layout
29160 \begin_layout Standard
29161 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
29162 \begin_inset Index idx
29165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29168 This is an italic dummy entry
29173 You can also format the page number using the character
29174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29181 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
29182 -command without a backslash.
29183 We can write for example
29186 \begin_layout Standard
29189 italic page number:|textit
29192 \begin_layout Standard
29193 to get the page number in italic.
29194 \begin_inset Index idx
29197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29198 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
29203 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
29204 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
29206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29222 \begin_inset space ~
29228 Have a look at section
29229 \begin_inset space ~
29233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29235 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29239 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29243 \begin_layout Standard
29244 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29252 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
29256 to generate the index, see section
29257 \begin_inset space ~
29261 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29263 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
29272 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
29277 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
29278 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29281 key "latexcompanion"
29293 \begin_layout Standard
29294 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
29296 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
29297 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
29298 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
29299 If so, put the following in the preamble
29302 \begin_layout Standard
29314 \begin_layout Standard
29318 \begin_layout Standard
29324 \begin_layout Standard
29325 in the index entry.
29326 \begin_inset Index idx
29329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29330 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
29335 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
29336 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
29337 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
29340 \begin_layout Standard
29341 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
29342 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
29343 a bold font for all index entries.
29344 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
29356 documentation for details,
29357 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29359 key "makeindex,xindy"
29366 \begin_layout Subsection
29368 \begin_inset Index idx
29371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29378 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29380 name "subsec:Index-Program"
29387 \begin_layout Standard
29388 If the index generation program
29392 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
29393 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
29397 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
29398 distribution, is used.
29402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29407 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
29408 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
29409 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
29410 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
29411 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
29421 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
29423 dialog, see section
29424 \begin_inset space ~
29428 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29430 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29435 The available options are listed and explained in
29436 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29438 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
29443 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
29447 \begin_layout Standard
29448 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
29449 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
29452 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29453 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29457 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
29458 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
29461 \begin_layout Subsection
29465 \begin_layout Standard
29466 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
29467 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
29468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29475 next to the standard index.
29477 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
29478 that add this feature.
29485 \begin_inset Index idx
29488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29490 -packages ! splitidx
29495 package to generate multiple indexes.
29496 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
29501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29502 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
29504 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29511 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
29512 style, but it also includes
29513 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
29514 Please consult the package's manual for details.
29522 \begin_layout Standard
29523 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
29524 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
29526 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29527 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29530 and select the option
29532 Use multiple Indexes
29539 already contains the standard index
29540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29548 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
29549 also appear as a heading) to the
29553 input field and press the
29558 The new index now also appears in the list.
29559 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
29560 label color to the new index.
29563 \begin_layout Standard
29564 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
29567 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29574 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
29575 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
29576 are additional features:
29579 \begin_layout Itemize
29580 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
29581 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
29584 \begin_layout Itemize
29585 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
29586 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
29587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29594 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
29595 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
29596 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
29597 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
29600 \begin_layout Section
29601 Nomenclature/Glossary
29602 \begin_inset Index idx
29605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29612 \begin_inset Index idx
29615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29644 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29646 name "sec:Nomenclature"
29653 \begin_layout Standard
29654 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
29655 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
29656 called nomenclature or glossary.
29659 \begin_layout Standard
29660 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29667 \begin_inset Index idx
29670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29672 -packages ! nomencl
29678 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
29680 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29686 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29690 \begin_layout Standard
29691 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
29692 and then use the menu
29694 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29700 \begin_inset space ~
29705 or the toolbar button
29708 arg "nomencl-insert"
29713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29724 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
29727 \begin_layout Standard
29728 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
29729 The first is the term or
29733 that you wish to define.
29738 of the term or symbol.
29741 \begin_layout Standard
29742 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29750 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
29751 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
29759 \begin_layout Subsection
29760 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
29761 \begin_inset Index idx
29764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29765 Nomenclature ! Layout
29773 \begin_layout Standard
29774 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
29778 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
29781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29785 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29793 \begin_inset Newline newline
29801 \begin_inset Newline newline
29807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29814 character starts/ends the formula.
29815 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
29816 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
29818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29828 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
29838 \begin_layout Standard
29839 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29840 -syntax is given in section
29841 \begin_inset space ~
29845 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29847 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29854 \begin_layout Standard
29858 \begin_inset space ~
29863 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
29865 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
29866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29870 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29877 in this document is:
29878 \begin_inset Newline newline
29883 dummy entry for the character
29888 \begin_inset Newline newline
29900 \begin_inset space ~
29910 font use the command
29939 \begin_layout Standard
29940 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
29941 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29945 \begin_inset space \space{}
29949 \begin_inset Newline newline
29965 \begin_inset Newline newline
29968 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
29969 This command will make the font of all symbols
29976 \begin_inset space ~
29984 \begin_layout Standard
29985 If the characters |
29986 \begin_inset space \space{}
29990 \begin_inset space \space{}
29994 \begin_inset space \space{}
29998 \begin_inset space \space{}
30002 \begin_inset space \space{}
30005 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
30006 a quote character in front of them.
30007 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
30008 LatexCommand nomenclature
30009 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
30010 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
30017 \begin_layout Subsection
30018 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
30019 \begin_inset Index idx
30022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30023 Nomenclature ! Sort order
30031 \begin_layout Standard
30032 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30033 -code of the symbol
30035 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
30037 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
30040 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
30041 LatexCommand nomenclature
30043 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
30050 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
30054 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
30055 LatexCommand nomenclature
30058 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
30063 They will be sorted by
30064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30090 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
30093 will be sorted before the
30097 since the character
30098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30105 is considered in sorting.
30108 \begin_layout Standard
30109 To control the sort order, you can edit the
30112 \begin_inset space ~
30117 field of the nomenclature dialog.
30118 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
30120 For the example given, you can insert
30124 in this field for the
30125 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
30132 will be located before
30133 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
30139 \begin_layout Standard
30140 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
30145 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30154 \begin_layout Subsection
30155 Nomenclature Options
30156 \begin_inset Index idx
30159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30160 Nomenclature ! Options
30168 \begin_layout Standard
30173 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
30174 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
30177 \begin_layout Description
30178 refeq Appends the phrase
30179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30194 to every nomenclature entry, where
30200 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
30203 \begin_layout Description
30204 refpage Appends the phrase
30205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30220 to every nomenclature entry, where
30226 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
30229 \begin_layout Description
30230 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
30233 \begin_layout Standard
30234 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
30235 class options list in the
30237 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30241 In this document the options
30248 \begin_layout Standard
30249 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
30255 \begin_layout Standard
30256 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
30257 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
30262 field in the nomenclature dialog:
30265 \begin_layout Description
30275 \begin_layout Description
30278 nomrefpage Like the
30285 \begin_layout Description
30288 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
30297 \begin_layout Description
30301 \begin_inset space ~
30307 \begin_inset space ~
30312 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
30315 \begin_layout Standard
30317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30324 are automatically translated for some document languages.
30325 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30329 \begin_layout Standard
30337 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
30340 \begin_inset Newline newline
30347 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
30352 \begin_inset Newline newline
30356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30371 by their translation.
30374 \begin_layout Subsection
30375 Printing the Nomenclature
30376 \begin_inset Index idx
30379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30380 Nomenclature ! Printing
30388 \begin_layout Standard
30389 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
30391 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30392 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30408 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
30409 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
30410 You can choose between these settings:
30413 \begin_layout Description
30414 Default a space of 1
30415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30421 \begin_layout Description
30423 \begin_inset space ~
30427 \begin_inset space ~
30430 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
30433 \begin_layout Description
30434 Custom custom space
30437 \begin_layout Standard
30438 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
30439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30447 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
30455 For example, in order to change the name to
30459 , add the following line to the preamble:
30462 \begin_layout Standard
30470 nomname}{List of Symbols}
30473 \begin_layout Subsection
30474 Nomenclature Program
30475 \begin_inset Index idx
30478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30479 Nomenclature ! Program
30485 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30487 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
30494 \begin_layout Standard
30500 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
30501 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
30503 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
30508 by adding options, see section
30509 \begin_inset space ~
30513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30515 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
30520 The available options are listed and explained in
30521 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30523 key "nomencl,makeindex"
30530 \begin_layout Section
30532 \begin_inset Index idx
30535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30542 \begin_inset Index idx
30545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30546 Document ! Branches
30552 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30554 name "sec:Branches"
30561 \begin_layout Standard
30562 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
30563 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
30564 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
30565 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
30568 \begin_layout Standard
30569 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
30570 allows you to put text into branches.
30571 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
30572 To create a branch, either select the menu
30574 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30575 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
30578 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
30580 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30587 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
30588 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
30589 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
30590 and whether the name of the branch should
30591 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
30592 (see below for an example).
30593 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
30594 to the name of the other) and to add
30595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30603 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30607 \begin_inset space ~
30610 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
30611 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
30614 \begin_layout Standard
30615 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
30616 These boxes are inserted via the menu
30618 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30621 where you can choose a branch.
30622 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
30626 \begin_layout Standard
30627 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
30628 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
30631 \begin_layout Standard
30632 \begin_inset Branch Question
30636 \begin_layout Standard
30637 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
30645 \begin_layout Standard
30646 \begin_inset Branch Answer
30650 \begin_layout Standard
30651 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
30659 \begin_layout Standard
30666 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30667 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30670 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
30671 Consider for example a file
30672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30679 which has the above branches.
30681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30688 is active, the PDF export file would be called
30689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30712 branch were inactive,
30713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30728 branch was active, likewise
30729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30744 branch was active, and
30745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30748 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
30749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30752 if both branches were active.
30753 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
30754 \change_inserted 424524441 1468296009
30758 \begin_layout Standard
30760 \change_inserted 424524441 1468297080
30761 As of LyX 2.3.0, there are also
30762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30769 branch insets, whose content is output just in case the branch is
30775 \begin_inset Branch Question
30779 \begin_layout Standard
30781 \change_inserted 424524441 1468296217
30782 For example, this material will only appear when the Question branch is
30790 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
30791 To control whether a particular inset is
30792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30799 , right-click on the inset button and choose
30800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30806 \change_inserted 424524441 1468297080
30808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30812 \change_deleted 424524441 1468296150
30816 \begin_layout Standard
30817 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
30823 \begin_layout Standard
30824 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
30825 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
30826 definitions for each branch.
30827 For example you can define for the question branch
30831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30832 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30833 -syntax, see section
30834 \begin_inset space ~
30838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30840 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30852 \begin_layout Standard
30862 \begin_layout Standard
30872 \begin_layout Standard
30873 and for the answer branch
30876 \begin_layout Standard
30886 \begin_layout Standard
30896 \begin_layout Standard
30897 \begin_inset Branch Question
30901 \begin_layout Standard
30905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30933 \begin_layout Standard
30934 \begin_inset Branch Answer
30938 \begin_layout Standard
30942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30970 \begin_layout Standard
30971 Now it is possible to use the
30975 question{\SpecialChar ldots
30982 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
30985 commands to obtain conditional output.
30986 Here is an example formula where only the
30993 \begin_inset Formula
30995 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
31003 \begin_layout Standard
31004 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
31012 \begin_layout Standard
31013 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
31015 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31019 \begin_inset space \space{}
31022 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
31024 For this advanced usage, see the
31030 Flex insets and InsetLayout
31035 \begin_layout Section
31037 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31039 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
31044 \begin_inset Index idx
31047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31056 \begin_layout Standard
31059 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31060 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31063 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
31065 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31071 \begin_inset Index idx
31074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31076 -packages ! hyperref
31081 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
31082 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
31083 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
31084 part of the document.
31088 \begin_layout Standard
31089 The header information in the dialog tab
31093 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
31094 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
31095 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
31096 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
31100 \begin_inset space ~
31104 \begin_inset space ~
31109 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
31110 tries to extract the header information from your document title
31111 and author entries.
31115 \begin_inset space ~
31119 \begin_inset space ~
31123 \begin_inset space ~
31128 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
31131 \begin_layout Standard
31132 You can specify in the dialog tab
31136 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
31141 \begin_inset space ~
31145 \begin_inset space ~
31149 \begin_inset space ~
31154 option allows long links to be split;
31157 \begin_inset space ~
31161 \begin_inset space ~
31165 \begin_inset space ~
31173 \begin_inset space ~
31178 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
31181 \begin_inset space ~
31186 colors the different links.
31187 The default colors are:
31190 \begin_layout Labeling
31191 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
31196 for hyperlinks and URLs
31199 \begin_layout Labeling
31200 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
31208 \begin_layout Labeling
31209 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
31217 \begin_layout Standard
31218 but you can change these in the field
31223 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
31226 \begin_layout Standard
31229 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
31232 \begin_layout Standard
31237 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
31238 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
31239 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
31242 \begin_layout Standard
31247 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
31248 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
31249 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
31259 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
31260 when opening the PDF.
31262 \begin_inset space ~
31265 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
31266 \begin_inset space ~
31269 1 will only display the sections.
31272 \begin_layout Standard
31273 PDF properties are also used in this document.
31274 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
31280 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
31281 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31290 \begin_layout Section
31292 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31294 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31296 name "sec:TeX-Code"
31303 \begin_layout Subsection
31306 \begin_inset Index idx
31309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31317 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31319 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
31326 \begin_layout Standard
31327 As \SpecialChar LyX
31328 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
31329 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
31330 commands and constructs,
31333 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
31334 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
31335 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
31336 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31337 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
31338 cannot support all packages and
31342 \begin_layout Standard
31343 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
31344 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
31345 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
31349 Code box is created by the menu
31351 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31353 \begin_inset space ~
31358 or by the toolbar button
31371 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
31379 \begin_layout Standard
31380 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
31382 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
31384 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
31385 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31392 , you can write the command part
31398 in a \SpecialChar TeX
31399 Code box before the word and the closing brace
31403 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
31404 Code box behind the word.
31405 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
31406 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
31410 \begin_layout Standard
31411 \begin_inset Graphics
31412 filename clipart/ERT.png
31420 \begin_layout Standard
31424 \begin_layout Standard
31425 This is a line with a
31429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31452 \begin_layout Standard
31453 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31461 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31462 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
31463 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
31464 know that the command is finished.
31472 \begin_layout Subsection
31473 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31475 \begin_inset Argument 1
31478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31479 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
31486 \begin_inset Index idx
31489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31497 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31499 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31506 \begin_layout Standard
31507 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
31508 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31509 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
31510 uses in the background.
31511 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
31512 is based on commands, you can
31513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31521 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
31522 any time if you know the right commands.
31523 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
31524 is the end of the day.
31525 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
31526 all caption labels bold.
31527 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
31529 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
31533 \begin_layout Standard
31534 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
31536 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31538 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31541 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31550 \begin_layout Standard
31551 As result you find that the package
31556 \begin_inset Index idx
31559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31561 -packages ! caption
31567 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
31569 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31572 \SpecialChar menuseparator
31576 \begin_inset space ~
31584 \begin_layout Standard
31589 usepackage[options]{package name}
31592 \begin_layout Standard
31593 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
31594 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
31595 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
31596 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
31599 \begin_layout Standard
31600 In your case the package name is
31605 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
31610 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
31611 So you add the command
31614 \begin_layout Standard
31619 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
31622 \begin_layout Standard
31623 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
31627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31628 For more commands provided by the
31632 package, have a look at its documentation,
31633 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31647 \begin_layout Standard
31648 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
31650 For example if you use a
31654 class, you don't need the package
31658 , you can instead write
31661 \begin_layout Standard
31666 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
31671 \begin_layout Standard
31672 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
31673 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
31674 documentation of the document class you want to use.
31681 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
31684 \begin_layout Standard
31685 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
31686 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
31688 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31689 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
31690 Code box as described in the previous
31694 \begin_layout Standard
31695 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
31696 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31699 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31701 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
31708 \begin_layout Standard
31709 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
31715 \begin_layout Standard
31719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31729 \begin_inset Note Note
31732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31733 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
31741 \begin_layout Left Header
31742 \begin_inset Argument 1
31745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31765 \begin_inset Note Note
31768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31769 defines the header line as described below
31777 \begin_layout Center Header
31778 \begin_inset Argument 1
31781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31790 \begin_layout Right Header
31791 \begin_inset Argument 1
31794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31815 \begin_layout Left Footer
31816 \begin_inset Argument 1
31819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31840 \begin_layout Center Footer
31841 \begin_inset Argument 1
31844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31856 \begin_inset Newline newline
31860 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31866 \begin_layout Right Footer
31867 \begin_inset Argument 1
31870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31892 \begin_layout Section
31893 Customized Page Headers and Footers
31894 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31896 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
31901 \begin_inset Index idx
31904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31905 Document ! Header/Footer line
31911 \begin_inset Index idx
31914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31923 \begin_layout Standard
31924 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
31928 \begin_inset space ~
31939 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31945 \begin_inset space ~
31951 As a second step add in the menu
31953 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31954 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31963 Custom Header/Footerlines
31966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31970 This module offers the following 6
31971 \begin_inset space ~
31977 \begin_layout Description
31979 \begin_inset space ~
31983 \begin_inset space ~
31987 \begin_inset space ~
31991 \begin_inset space ~
31995 \begin_inset space ~
32001 \begin_layout Description
32003 \begin_inset space ~
32007 \begin_inset space ~
32011 \begin_inset space ~
32015 \begin_inset space ~
32019 \begin_inset space ~
32025 \begin_layout Standard
32026 for the different positions in the header/footer.
32027 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
32030 \begin_layout Standard
32031 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
32032 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
32034 \begin_inset space ~
32038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32040 reference "fig:Page-layout"
32044 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
32047 \begin_layout Standard
32048 \begin_inset Float figure
32054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32057 \begin_inset Tabular
32058 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
32059 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
32060 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
32061 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
32062 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
32064 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
32076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32082 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32093 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32111 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32122 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
32125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32126 The normal text on the page goes here.
32127 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
32129 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
32130 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
32135 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32144 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32155 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32173 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32184 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
32196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32202 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32220 \begin_inset Caption Standard
32222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32223 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32225 name "fig:Page-layout"
32229 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
32242 \begin_layout Standard
32243 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32251 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
32255 \begin_inset space ~
32260 is set to “Default”.
32261 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
32270 \begin_layout Subsection
32274 \begin_layout Standard
32275 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
32276 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
32277 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
32278 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
32280 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
32282 Defining the footer line works similarly.
32285 \begin_layout Standard
32286 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
32287 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
32291 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32293 \begin_inset space ~
32301 \begin_layout Description
32304 thepage prints the current page number
32307 \begin_layout Description
32310 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
32313 \begin_layout Description
32316 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
32319 \begin_layout Description
32322 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
32323 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
32326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32330 \begin_inset Quotes prd
32333 because it usually goes in a left header.
32336 \begin_layout Description
32339 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
32340 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
32342 It is normally used in the right header.
32345 \begin_layout Subsection
32346 Default header/footer
32349 \begin_layout Standard
32350 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
32351 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
32352 footer has the page number.
32353 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
32354 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
32355 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
32358 \begin_inset space ~
32366 \begin_layout Subsection
32370 \begin_layout Standard
32371 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
32372 Some pages are different.
32373 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
32374 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
32375 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
32376 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
32377 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
32380 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32381 Header and footer decoration line
32384 \begin_layout Standard
32385 By default, you get a 0.4
32386 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32389 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
32390 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
32402 in the following way:
32405 \begin_layout Standard
32412 headrulewidth}{thickness}
32415 \begin_layout Standard
32416 where thickness is a size in standard units like
32429 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
32430 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32436 \begin_layout Standard
32437 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32439 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
32440 \begin_inset space ~
32444 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32453 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32454 Several header/footer lines
32457 \begin_layout Standard
32458 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
32459 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
32460 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
32462 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32477 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32478 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32480 \begin_inset space ~
32488 \begin_layout Standard
32495 headheight}{height}
32498 \begin_layout Standard
32503 is a size in standard units (e.
32504 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32508 \begin_inset space \space{}
32516 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
32517 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
32518 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32519 logfile with the menu
32521 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32523 \begin_inset space ~
32531 \begin_inset space ~
32536 to see if you can find a warning about the package
32541 \begin_inset Index idx
32544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32546 -packages ! fancyhdr
32552 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
32553 for your header/footer.
32556 \begin_layout Subsection
32560 \begin_layout Standard
32561 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
32562 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
32563 This example consists of the following definition:
32566 \begin_layout Description
32568 \begin_inset space ~
32577 , empty optional argument
32580 \begin_layout Description
32582 \begin_inset space ~
32585 Header empty, empty optional argument
32588 \begin_layout Description
32590 \begin_inset space ~
32599 in the optional argument
32602 \begin_layout Description
32604 \begin_inset space ~
32613 in the optional argument
32616 \begin_layout Description
32618 \begin_inset space ~
32631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32635 \begin_inset Newline newline
32639 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
32643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32646 in the optional argument
32649 \begin_layout Description
32651 \begin_inset space ~
32660 , empty optional argument
32663 \begin_layout Description
32666 headrulewidth set to 2
32667 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32673 \begin_layout Standard
32674 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
32675 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
32681 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32690 \begin_layout Standard
32691 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
32697 \begin_layout Standard
32701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32705 pagestyle{headings}
32711 \begin_inset Note Note
32714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32715 switches back to page style with the default headings
32723 \begin_layout Section
32724 Previewing Snippets of your Document
32725 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32727 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
32732 \begin_inset Index idx
32735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32742 \begin_inset Index idx
32745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32754 \begin_layout Standard
32756 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
32757 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
32758 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
32761 \begin_layout Subsection
32765 \begin_layout Standard
32766 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32772 \begin_inset Index idx
32775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32777 -packages ! preview-latex
32782 (on some systems named simply
32787 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
32789 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32795 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32797 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
32805 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
32806 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32807 -package are automatically
32808 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
32812 \begin_layout Subsection
32816 \begin_layout Standard
32817 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
32818 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
32820 activate the option
32823 \begin_inset space ~
32830 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32836 \begin_inset space ~
32840 \begin_inset space ~
32843 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
32850 \begin_inset space ~
32863 \begin_inset space ~
32868 is the multiplication factor for the size.
32871 \begin_layout Standard
32872 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
32877 \begin_inset space ~
32885 \begin_inset space ~
32893 \begin_layout Standard
32894 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
32895 and when you finish
32899 \begin_layout Standard
32900 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32908 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
32909 generated by activating the option
32912 \begin_inset space ~
32918 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
32926 \begin_layout Subsection
32927 Selected document parts
32930 \begin_layout Standard
32931 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
32932 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
32933 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
32934 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32936 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
32938 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32942 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
32943 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
32944 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
32947 \begin_layout Standard
32948 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32955 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32967 is explained in section
32969 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
32974 \begin_inset space ~
32984 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
32985 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
32986 the final rotated boxes,
32987 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
32988 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
32990 Here is the result:
32993 \begin_layout Standard
32994 \begin_inset Preview
32996 \begin_layout Standard
33001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33005 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
33011 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
33021 height_special "totalheight"
33026 backgroundcolor "none"
33029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33054 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
33060 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
33067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33082 \begin_layout Standard
33083 Previewing works also for colors.
33084 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33103 is explained in section
33110 \begin_inset space ~
33123 \begin_layout Standard
33124 \begin_inset Preview
33126 \begin_layout Standard
33130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33149 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
33154 This is text within a colored, framed box.
33158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33173 \begin_layout Standard
33174 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
33180 \begin_layout Standard
33181 If \SpecialChar LyX
33182 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
33183 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
33184 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
33185 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33186 packages in your document preamble that are required by
33187 the \SpecialChar TeX
33189 If \SpecialChar LyX
33190 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
33191 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
33193 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
33194 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
33195 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
33198 \begin_layout Subsection
33203 \begin_layout Standard
33204 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33205 source of the whole document or parts of it.
33208 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
33210 \begin_inset space ~
33215 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33217 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
33219 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
33220 's main window, then only this selection
33221 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
33222 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
33223 the source view window.
33228 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
33229 ; but note that if you have
33230 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
33232 not just the one which is open at the time.
33235 \begin_layout Section
33236 Advanced Find and Replace
33237 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33239 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
33244 \begin_inset Index idx
33247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33254 \begin_inset Index idx
33257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33266 \begin_layout Subsection
33270 \begin_layout Standard
33271 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
33272 allows for searching of complex,
33273 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
33275 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
33276 The key-features are:
33279 \begin_layout Itemize
33280 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
33281 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
33282 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
33286 \begin_layout Itemize
33287 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
33288 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
33289 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
33290 a section heading will only be found within section headings
33293 \begin_layout Itemize
33294 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
33295 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
33296 outside of mathematics environments
33299 \begin_layout Itemize
33300 Search may be widened to a specific
33305 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33309 \begin_inset space ~
33312 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
33313 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
33320 \begin_layout Itemize
33321 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
33322 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
33323 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33327 \begin_inset space ~
33330 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
33333 \begin_layout Subsection
33337 \begin_layout Standard
33338 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
33340 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
33353 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
33356 ) or the toolbar button
33359 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
33365 Advanced Find and Replace
33370 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33374 \begin_layout Standard
33380 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
33384 \begin_inset space ~
33389 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
33392 arg "paragraph-break"
33396 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
33397 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
33401 arg "paragraph-break"
33404 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
33408 searches backwards.
33411 \begin_layout Standard
33415 \begin_inset space ~
33420 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
33429 \begin_inset space ~
33434 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
33437 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33438 Searching for mathematics
33441 \begin_layout Standard
33442 Mathematical formulas, such as
33443 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
33446 or something more complex like
33447 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
33450 , may be searched for by typing them in the
33455 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
33456 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
33457 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
33458 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
33464 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33468 \begin_layout Standard
33469 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
33470 This is done by switching to the
33474 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
33479 This way, entering in the
33486 \begin_layout Itemize
33487 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
33488 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
33491 \begin_layout Itemize
33492 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
33493 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
33496 \begin_layout Itemize
33497 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
33498 of it only within section headings.
33499 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
33500 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
33504 \begin_layout Itemize
33505 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
33506 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
33509 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33513 \begin_layout Standard
33514 The entries made in the
33518 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
33521 \begin_inset space ~
33527 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
33531 button or alternatively press
33534 arg "paragraph-break"
33541 while the cursor is in the
33544 \begin_inset space ~
33552 \begin_layout Standard
33553 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
33555 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
33559 \begin_layout Itemize
33560 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
33561 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
33562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33569 with its typewriter version
33570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33584 \begin_layout Itemize
33585 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
33587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33591 \begin_inset Formula $R$
33595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33603 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
33607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33610 (you may want to enable the
33613 \begin_inset space ~
33621 \begin_inset space ~
33626 options and disable the
33634 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
33635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33642 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
33643 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
33647 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
33650 , or occurrences of
33651 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
33655 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
33661 \begin_layout Subsection
33665 \begin_layout Standard
33666 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
33670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33671 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
33673 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33675 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
33684 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
33690 This is done with the context menu
33692 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33693 Insert Regular Expression
33695 while the cursor is in the
33700 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
33701 expression matching rules
33705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33706 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
33709 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33713 \begin_inset space ~
33716 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
33717 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
33723 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
33724 same text in the document.
33725 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
33726 Examples of using such a feature may be:
33729 \begin_layout Enumerate
33730 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
33735 editor the fraction
33736 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
33740 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
33743 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
33744 fractions with the given denominator.
33747 \begin_layout Enumerate
33748 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
33760 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
33765 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
33766 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
33767 Also, by inserting a
33768 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
33771 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
33772 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
33775 \begin_layout Standard
33776 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
33777 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
33778 \begin_inset Formula $()$
33781 , and referring back to them through
33782 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
33786 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
33790 For example, try searching with the regexp
33791 \begin_inset Newline newline
33794 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
33797 \begin_inset Newline newline
33800 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
33803 \begin_layout Standard
33804 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
33807 \begin_layout Standard
33808 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33816 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
33817 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
33818 sub-expressions is absolute.
33820 \begin_inset space ~
33824 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
33827 always refers to the first occurrence of
33828 \begin_inset Formula $()$
33831 in all entered regexps.
33839 \begin_layout Section
33841 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33843 name "sec:Spellchecking"
33848 \begin_inset Index idx
33851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33860 \begin_layout Standard
33862 has a built-in spell checker.
33865 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33872 key or the toolbar button
33875 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
33878 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
33879 beginning of the currently selected text.
33880 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
33881 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
33882 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
33883 scrolled so that it is visible.
33884 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
33885 n, if any could be found.
33886 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
33890 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
33891 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
33894 \begin_layout Standard
33895 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
33898 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33902 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
33903 a different one at the top of the dialog.
33905 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
33906 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
33909 \begin_inset space ~
33917 arg "dialog-show character"
33920 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
33922 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
33925 \begin_layout Standard
33926 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
33927 can be downloaded from here:
33928 \begin_inset Newline newline
33932 \begin_inset Flex URL
33935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33937 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
33943 \begin_inset Newline newline
33947 \begin_inset space ~
33950 files for each language.
33951 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
33952 \begin_inset space ~
33955 files into \SpecialChar LyX
33956 's installation subfolder
33964 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33966 \begin_inset Newline newline
33969 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
33970 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
33971 but in most cases these are
33987 is the language code.
33990 \begin_layout Subsection
33994 \begin_layout Standard
33997 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33998 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34000 \begin_inset space ~
34003 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34006 you can set the following things:
34009 \begin_layout Description
34011 \begin_inset space ~
34014 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
34015 should use for spell checking.
34016 Depending on your platform,
34030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34031 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
34032 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
34047 \begin_inset space ~
34050 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
34053 \begin_layout Description
34055 \begin_inset space ~
34058 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
34059 will always use the given language
34060 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
34063 \begin_layout Description
34065 \begin_inset space ~
34068 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
34070 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34074 \begin_inset space \space{}
34078 This should normally not be needed.
34081 \begin_layout Description
34083 \begin_inset space ~
34087 \begin_inset space ~
34090 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
34092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34102 \begin_layout Description
34104 \begin_inset space ~
34107 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
34108 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
34109 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
34110 appear in a context menu.
34111 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
34115 \begin_layout Description
34117 \begin_inset space ~
34121 \begin_inset space ~
34125 \begin_inset space ~
34128 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
34132 \begin_layout Section
34134 \begin_inset Index idx
34137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34144 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34146 name "sec:Thesaurus"
34153 \begin_layout Standard
34155 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
34156 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
34165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34166 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34168 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
34177 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
34179 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
34180 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
34181 which are available for many languages.
34184 \begin_layout Standard
34185 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
34186 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
34190 \begin_layout Subsection
34191 Setting up the thesaurus
34194 \begin_layout Standard
34203 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
34207 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
34212 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
34214 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34218 \begin_inset space ~
34226 For instance, the US English files are named:
34229 \begin_layout Itemize
34233 \begin_layout Itemize
34237 \begin_layout Standard
34246 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
34247 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
34250 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34251 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34252 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
34254 \begin_inset space ~
34259 ) to the path where they are installed.
34263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34264 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
34265 ies, typical locations are
34271 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
34275 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
34279 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
34282 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
34288 LibreOffice-<Version>
34295 On the Mac, the default location is
34297 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
34298 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
34299 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
34300 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
34301 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
34302 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
34310 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
34311 during the \SpecialChar LyX
34312 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
34316 \begin_layout Standard
34317 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
34318 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
34322 \begin_layout Itemize
34323 \begin_inset Flex URL
34326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34328 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
34336 \begin_layout Standard
34337 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
34338 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
34340 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34341 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34342 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
34344 \begin_inset space ~
34349 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
34351 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
34352 and point \SpecialChar LyX
34356 \begin_layout Standard
34357 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
34359 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
34362 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
34368 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
34371 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
34372 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
34374 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34380 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34381 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34382 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
34384 \begin_inset space ~
34389 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
34392 \begin_layout Subsection
34393 Using the thesaurus
34396 \begin_layout Standard
34397 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
34399 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34402 or the toolbar button
34405 arg "thesaurus-entry"
34408 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
34410 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
34412 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
34413 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
34414 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
34423 ), related terms (such as
34426 \begin_inset space ~
34435 ), compounds (such as
34438 \begin_inset space ~
34447 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
34456 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
34459 \begin_layout Standard
34460 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
34461 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
34465 \begin_layout Standard
34466 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
34467 the dictionary, such as the above
34471 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
34472 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34476 \begin_inset space \space{}
34479 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
34480 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
34481 For example, looking up the word form
34485 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
34490 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
34491 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34495 \begin_inset space \space{}
34506 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
34507 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
34508 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
34511 \begin_layout Section
34513 \begin_inset Index idx
34516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34523 \begin_inset Index idx
34526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34527 Document ! Change Tracking
34533 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34535 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
34542 \begin_layout Standard
34543 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
34544 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
34545 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
34546 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
34548 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34550 \begin_inset space ~
34553 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34555 \begin_inset space ~
34563 \begin_layout Standard
34564 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
34578 The color depends on the author that made the change.
34579 You can change the color in
34581 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34582 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34584 \begin_inset space ~
34588 \begin_inset space ~
34593 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34599 \begin_inset Index idx
34602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34603 Color ! Change tracking
34608 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
34609 's status bar when the
34610 cursor is in changed text.
34611 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
34614 arg "changes-merge"
34620 \begin_layout Standard
34621 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
34623 \begin_inset Index idx
34626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34635 \begin_layout Standard
34636 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34642 \begin_layout Standard
34643 \begin_inset Graphics
34644 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
34652 \begin_layout Standard
34653 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34659 \begin_layout Standard
34660 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
34663 \begin_layout Standard
34664 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34670 \begin_layout Standard
34671 \begin_inset Tabular
34672 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
34673 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
34674 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
34675 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
34676 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34685 arg "changes-track"
34693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34699 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34701 \begin_inset space ~
34704 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34706 \begin_inset space ~
34715 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34724 arg "changes-output"
34732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34738 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34740 \begin_inset space ~
34743 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34745 \begin_inset space ~
34749 \begin_inset space ~
34753 \begin_inset space ~
34762 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34783 Jumps to the next change
34789 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34798 arg "change-accept"
34806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34812 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34814 \begin_inset space ~
34817 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34819 \begin_inset space ~
34828 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34837 arg "change-reject"
34845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34851 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34853 \begin_inset space ~
34856 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34858 \begin_inset space ~
34867 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34876 arg "changes-merge"
34884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34890 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34892 \begin_inset space ~
34895 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34897 \begin_inset space ~
34906 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34915 arg "all-changes-accept"
34923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34929 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34931 \begin_inset space ~
34934 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34936 \begin_inset space ~
34940 \begin_inset space ~
34949 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34958 arg "all-changes-reject"
34966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34972 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34974 \begin_inset space ~
34977 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34979 \begin_inset space ~
34983 \begin_inset space ~
34992 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35015 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35016 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
35018 \begin_inset space ~
35027 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35050 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
35052 \begin_inset space ~
35068 \begin_layout Standard
35069 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35075 \begin_layout Standard
35076 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
35096 \begin_layout Standard
35097 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
35098 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
35099 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
35100 the next change after the current cursor position.
35101 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
35102 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
35103 step to the next change.
35104 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
35107 \begin_layout Standard
35108 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
35109 to describe a change.
35112 \begin_layout Standard
35113 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35119 \begin_inset Index idx
35122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35124 -packages ! dvipost
35130 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
35132 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35138 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35142 \begin_layout Section
35143 Comparison of Documents
35144 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35146 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
35151 \begin_inset Index idx
35154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35155 Comparison of documents
35163 \begin_layout Standard
35164 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
35167 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35171 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
35172 file with change tracking enabled showing the
35174 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
35176 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
35180 \begin_inset space ~
35184 \begin_inset space ~
35188 \begin_inset space ~
35197 \begin_inset space ~
35201 \begin_inset space ~
35205 \begin_inset space ~
35209 \begin_inset space ~
35213 \begin_inset space ~
35217 \begin_inset space ~
35222 enables the change tracking option
35225 \begin_inset space ~
35229 \begin_inset space ~
35233 \begin_inset space ~
35238 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
35241 \begin_layout Section
35242 International Support
35243 \begin_inset Index idx
35246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35247 International support
35255 \begin_layout Standard
35256 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
35257 with any language you want.
35258 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
35259 up \SpecialChar LyX
35261 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35263 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
35270 \begin_layout Standard
35271 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
35272 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
35273 \begin_inset space ~
35277 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35279 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
35286 \begin_layout Subsection
35288 \begin_inset Index idx
35291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35298 \begin_inset Index idx
35301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35302 Document ! Settings
35308 \begin_inset Index idx
35311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35312 Document ! Language
35320 \begin_layout Standard
35323 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35324 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35327 dialog lets you set
35329 the language, the quote style and character encoding
35334 \begin_layout Standard
35339 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
35344 \begin_inset space ~
35349 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
35350 For details about the different encoding options see section
35351 \begin_inset space ~
35355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35357 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
35364 \begin_layout Subsection
35365 Keyboard mapping configuration
35366 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35368 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
35375 \begin_layout Standard
35376 If you have for example a U.
35377 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35380 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
35381 can use an alternate keymap.
35382 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
35387 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35388 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35389 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
35392 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
35393 \begin_inset space ~
35397 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35399 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
35404 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
35405 which one you want to use.
35408 \begin_layout Standard
35409 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
35410 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
35411 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
35412 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35415 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
35416 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
35417 one to support the characters you want.
35418 This and many other customizations are explained in the
35425 \begin_layout Chapter
35428 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35430 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
35437 \begin_layout Standard
35438 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
35439 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
35440 topic inside the user's guide.
35443 \begin_layout Section
35445 \begin_inset Index idx
35448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35457 \begin_layout Standard
35462 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
35465 \begin_layout Subsection
35469 \begin_layout Standard
35470 Creates a new document.
35473 \begin_layout Subsection
35477 \begin_layout Standard
35478 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
35479 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
35480 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
35483 \begin_layout Subsection
35487 \begin_layout Standard
35491 \begin_layout Subsection
35495 \begin_layout Standard
35496 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
35497 Click there on a file to open it.
35500 \begin_layout Subsection
35504 \begin_layout Standard
35505 Closes the current document.
35508 \begin_layout Subsection
35512 \begin_layout Standard
35513 Closes all opened documents.
35516 \begin_layout Subsection
35520 \begin_layout Standard
35521 Saves the actual document.
35524 \begin_layout Subsection
35528 \begin_layout Standard
35529 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
35532 \begin_layout Subsection
35536 \begin_layout Standard
35537 Saves all opened documents.
35540 \begin_layout Subsection
35544 \begin_layout Standard
35545 Reloads the actual document from disk.
35548 \begin_layout Subsection
35552 \begin_layout Standard
35553 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
35554 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
35555 It is described in the section
35557 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
35562 Additional Features
35567 \begin_layout Subsection
35571 \begin_layout Standard
35572 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
35573 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
35575 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
35576 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
35580 \begin_layout Standard
35581 When using the menu entry
35584 \begin_inset space ~
35589 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
35593 \begin_inset space ~
35597 \begin_inset space ~
35601 \begin_inset space ~
35606 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
35607 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
35610 \begin_layout Subsection
35612 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35614 name "subsec:Export"
35621 \begin_layout Standard
35622 You can export your document to various file formats.
35623 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
35625 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
35626 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
35627 during its configuration.
35630 \begin_layout Standard
35631 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
35633 \begin_inset space ~
35637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35639 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
35646 \begin_layout Description
35652 \begin_inset space ~
35655 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
35657 \begin_inset space ~
35660 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
35661 \begin_inset Newline newline
35664 Since \SpecialChar LyX
35665 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
35669 \begin_layout Description
35670 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
35676 \begin_layout Description
35678 \begin_inset space ~
35681 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
35687 \begin_layout Description
35688 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
35689 's native DVI-format.
35690 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
35691 files paths or file names in your document.
35693 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
35700 \begin_layout Description
35701 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
35702 in files paths or file names
35705 \begin_layout Description
35707 \begin_inset space ~
35714 ) DVI-format using the program
35716 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
35719 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
35723 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35731 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
35739 \begin_layout Description
35741 \begin_inset space ~
35744 (cropped) the same as
35748 but with cropped page margins.
35751 \begin_layout Description
35753 \begin_inset space ~
35756 Dot text file with code in the programming language
35760 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
35765 \begin_layout Description
35769 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35777 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
35785 \begin_layout Description
35787 \begin_inset space ~
35791 \begin_inset space ~
35794 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
35798 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
35806 \begin_layout Description
35810 \begin_inset space ~
35819 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35820 source that is compilable with the program
35822 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
35826 \begin_layout Description
35830 \begin_inset space ~
35835 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35836 source, additionally all images used in the document
35837 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
35841 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
35844 \begin_layout Description
35848 \begin_inset space ~
35853 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35854 source code, additionally all images used in the document
35855 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
35863 \begin_layout Description
35867 \begin_inset space ~
35876 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35877 source that is compilable with the program
35883 \begin_layout Description
35885 \begin_inset space ~
35889 \begin_inset space ~
35896 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35897 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
35903 \begin_layout Description
35905 \begin_inset space ~
35908 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
35909 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
35911 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35915 \begin_inset space \space{}
35920 \begin_inset space ~
35924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35939 represent the version number)
35942 \begin_layout Description
35944 \begin_inset space ~
35948 \begin_inset space ~
35951 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
35952 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
35953 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35957 \begin_layout Description
35958 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
35959 's internal XHTML engine
35962 \begin_layout Description
35964 \begin_inset space ~
35968 \begin_inset space ~
35972 \begin_inset space ~
35976 \begin_inset space ~
35979 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
35984 For the conversion the program
35993 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35996 \begin_layout Description
35997 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
36002 \begin_layout Description
36004 \begin_inset space ~
36007 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
36009 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
36012 For the conversion the program
36021 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
36024 \begin_layout Description
36026 \begin_inset space ~
36029 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
36030 For the conversion the program
36039 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
36042 \begin_layout Description
36044 \begin_inset space ~
36047 (cropped) the same as
36050 \begin_inset space ~
36055 but with cropped page margins
36058 \begin_layout Description
36062 \begin_inset space ~
36067 PDF-format using the program
36071 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
36074 \begin_layout Description
36078 \begin_inset space ~
36082 \begin_inset space ~
36090 \begin_inset space ~
36095 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
36096 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36100 \begin_inset space \space{}
36103 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
36107 \begin_layout Description
36111 \begin_inset space ~
36116 PDF-format using the program
36118 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
36121 , produces PDF-files directly
36124 \begin_layout Description
36128 \begin_inset space ~
36133 PDF-format using the program
36137 , produces PDF-files directly
36140 \begin_layout Description
36144 \begin_inset space ~
36149 PDF-format using the program
36153 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
36156 \begin_layout Description
36160 \begin_inset space ~
36165 PDF-format using the program
36170 , produces PDF-files directly
36173 \begin_layout Description
36177 \begin_inset space ~
36185 \begin_layout Description
36189 \begin_inset space ~
36193 \begin_inset space ~
36198 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
36199 and then exported as text using the program
36204 \begin_layout Description
36209 PostScript format using the program
36217 options see section
36218 \begin_inset space ~
36222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36224 reference "subsec:General-output"
36231 \begin_layout Description
36232 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36233 source and also code in the statistical programming
36247 it is possible to use
36251 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
36255 \begin_layout Standard
36256 If one of the menu entries
36263 \begin_inset space ~
36272 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36274 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
36276 \begin_inset space ~
36280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36282 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
36287 \begin_inset Index idx
36290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36291 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
36300 \begin_layout Subsection
36304 \begin_layout Standard
36305 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
36306 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
36309 \begin_inset space ~
36313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36315 reference "sec:Paths"
36320 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
36329 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
36330 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
36331 's preferences as described in section
36332 \begin_inset space ~
36336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36338 reference "subsec:Converters"
36345 \begin_layout Subsection
36346 New and Close Window
36349 \begin_layout Standard
36350 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
36354 \begin_layout Subsection
36358 \begin_layout Standard
36359 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
36362 \begin_layout Section
36364 \begin_inset Index idx
36367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36376 \begin_layout Subsection
36380 \begin_layout Standard
36381 Described in section
36382 \begin_inset space ~
36386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36388 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
36395 \begin_layout Subsection
36396 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
36399 \begin_layout Standard
36400 Described in section
36401 \begin_inset space ~
36405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36407 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
36414 \begin_layout Subsection
36418 \begin_layout Standard
36419 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
36420 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
36423 \begin_layout Subsection
36427 \begin_layout Standard
36428 Selects the whole document.
36431 \begin_layout Subsection
36432 Find & Replace (Quick)
36435 \begin_layout Standard
36436 Described in section
36437 \begin_inset space ~
36441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36443 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
36450 \begin_layout Subsection
36451 Find & Replace (Advanced)
36454 \begin_layout Standard
36455 Described in section
36456 \begin_inset space ~
36460 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36462 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
36469 \begin_layout Subsection
36470 Move Paragraph Up/Down
36473 \begin_layout Standard
36474 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
36478 \begin_layout Subsection
36482 \begin_layout Standard
36483 Described in section
36484 \begin_inset space ~
36488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36490 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
36497 \begin_layout Subsection
36499 \begin_inset Index idx
36502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36503 Paragraph ! Settings
36511 \begin_layout Standard
36512 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
36513 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
36517 \begin_layout Standard
36518 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
36519 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
36525 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36526 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36528 \begin_inset space ~
36536 \begin_layout Subsection
36537 Table and Rows & Columns
36540 \begin_layout Standard
36541 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
36542 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
36543 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
36546 \begin_layout Subsection
36550 \begin_layout Standard
36551 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
36552 It will dissolve this inset.
36553 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
36557 \begin_layout Subsection
36561 \begin_layout Standard
36562 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
36563 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
36566 \begin_layout Subsection
36567 Increase/Decrease List Depth
36570 \begin_layout Standard
36571 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
36573 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
36574 \begin_inset space ~
36578 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36580 reference "sec:Nesting"
36585 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36587 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
36594 \begin_layout Subsection
36597 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
36600 \begin_layout Standard
36601 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
36602 nts of the same type.
36604 \begin_inset space ~
36608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36610 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
36614 for an explanation.
36617 \begin_layout Section
36619 \begin_inset Index idx
36622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36631 \begin_layout Standard
36632 At the bottom of the
36636 menu the opened documents are listed.
36639 \begin_layout Subsection
36640 Open/Close all Insets
36643 \begin_layout Standard
36644 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
36647 \begin_layout Subsection
36648 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
36651 \begin_layout Standard
36652 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
36655 \begin_layout Standard
36656 Math macros are described in the
36663 \begin_layout Subsection
36667 \begin_layout Standard
36668 Shows the outline window as described in sections
36669 \begin_inset space ~
36673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36675 reference "sec:Navigating"
36680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36682 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
36689 \begin_layout Subsection
36693 \begin_layout Standard
36694 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
36696 \begin_inset space ~
36700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36702 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36709 \begin_layout Subsection
36713 \begin_layout Standard
36714 Opens a window showing console messages.
36715 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
36717 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36720 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
36721 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
36722 is processing the document.
36725 \begin_layout Subsection
36727 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36729 name "subsec:Toolbars"
36734 \begin_inset Index idx
36737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36746 \begin_layout Standard
36747 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
36748 All toolbars and the
36751 \begin_inset space ~
36756 can be turned on and off.
36761 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
36773 \begin_inset space ~
36785 \begin_inset space ~
36790 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
36794 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
36801 \begin_layout Standard
36806 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
36810 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
36811 or when a certain feature is enabled.
36812 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
36813 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
36814 is inside a formula or table respectively.
36817 \begin_layout Standard
36819 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
36820 \begin_inset space ~
36824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36826 reference "sec:Toolbars"
36833 \begin_layout Subsection
36837 \begin_layout Standard
36841 \begin_inset space ~
36845 \begin_inset space ~
36849 \begin_inset space ~
36853 \begin_inset space ~
36857 \begin_inset space ~
36861 \begin_inset space ~
36866 will split \SpecialChar LyX
36867 's main window vertically while
36870 \begin_inset space ~
36874 \begin_inset space ~
36878 \begin_inset space ~
36882 \begin_inset space ~
36886 \begin_inset space ~
36890 \begin_inset space ~
36895 will split it horizontally.
36896 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
36897 to view the same document, but at different positions.
36898 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
36899 three or more documents at the same time.
36900 To close a split view, use the menu
36903 \begin_inset space ~
36907 \begin_inset space ~
36915 \begin_layout Subsection
36919 \begin_layout Standard
36920 Closes a split view.
36923 \begin_layout Subsection
36927 \begin_layout Standard
36928 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
36929 so that you will see nothing but your text.
36930 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
36931 's main window fullscreen.
36932 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
36933 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
36936 \begin_layout Section
36938 \begin_inset Index idx
36941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36950 \begin_layout Subsection
36954 \begin_layout Standard
36955 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
36956 \begin_inset space ~
36960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36962 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
36973 \begin_layout Subsection
36975 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36977 name "subsec:Special-Character"
36984 \begin_layout Standard
36985 Here you can insert the following characters:
36988 \begin_layout Description
36993 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
36996 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
36997 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36998 -packages you have installed.
36999 You can get a complete display by checking
37002 \begin_inset space ~
37008 \begin_inset Newline newline
37012 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37020 Not all characters will be visible in the
37024 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
37025 dialog (see section
37026 \begin_inset space ~
37030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37032 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
37036 ) can display every character.
37044 \begin_layout Description
37045 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
37049 \begin_layout Description
37051 \begin_inset space ~
37055 \begin_inset space ~
37058 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
37059 \begin_inset space ~
37063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37065 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
37072 \begin_layout Description
37074 \begin_inset space ~
37077 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
37080 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37081 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37087 \begin_layout Description
37089 \begin_inset space ~
37092 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
37095 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37096 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37102 \begin_layout Description
37104 \begin_inset space ~
37107 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
37111 \begin_layout Description
37113 \begin_inset space ~
37116 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
37120 \begin_layout Description
37122 \begin_inset space ~
37125 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
37131 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
37137 \begin_layout Description
37139 \begin_inset space ~
37142 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
37146 \begin_layout Description
37148 \begin_inset space ~
37152 \begin_inset Index idx
37155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37162 \begin_inset Index idx
37165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37166 Language ! Phonetic symbols
37171 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
37172 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
37174 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37180 \begin_inset Index idx
37183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37191 \begin_inset Newline newline
37194 More information about this feature can be found in the
37200 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
37206 \begin_layout Description
37207 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
37209 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
37210 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
37214 \begin_layout Subsection
37218 \begin_layout Standard
37219 Opens a submenu with the following options:
37222 \begin_layout Description
37223 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
37224 \begin_inset script superscript
37226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37235 \begin_layout Description
37236 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
37237 \begin_inset script subscript
37239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37248 \begin_layout Description
37250 \begin_inset space ~
37253 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
37254 \begin_inset space ~
37258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37260 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
37267 \begin_layout Description
37269 \begin_inset space ~
37272 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
37273 \begin_inset space ~
37277 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37279 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
37286 \begin_layout Description
37288 \begin_inset space ~
37291 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
37292 \begin_inset space ~
37296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37298 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
37305 \begin_layout Description
37307 \begin_inset space ~
37310 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
37312 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37316 \begin_inset space \space{}
37319 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
37320 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
37326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37329 To insert a fraction use the command
37334 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
37338 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
37344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37347 The visible space is hereby the character before the
37354 \begin_layout Description
37356 \begin_inset space ~
37359 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
37360 \begin_inset space ~
37364 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37366 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
37373 \begin_layout Description
37375 \begin_inset space ~
37378 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
37379 \begin_inset space ~
37383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37385 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
37392 \begin_layout Description
37394 \begin_inset space ~
37397 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
37398 \begin_inset space ~
37402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37404 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
37411 \begin_layout Description
37412 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
37413 \begin_inset space ~
37417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37419 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
37426 \begin_layout Description
37428 \begin_inset space ~
37431 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
37432 \begin_inset space ~
37436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37438 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
37445 \begin_layout Description
37447 \begin_inset space ~
37450 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
37451 \begin_inset space ~
37455 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37457 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
37464 \begin_layout Description
37466 \begin_inset space ~
37470 \begin_inset space ~
37473 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
37474 \begin_inset space ~
37478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37480 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
37487 \begin_layout Description
37489 \begin_inset space ~
37492 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
37493 as described in section
37494 \begin_inset space ~
37498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37500 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
37507 \begin_layout Description
37509 \begin_inset space ~
37512 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
37513 \begin_inset space ~
37517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37519 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
37526 \begin_layout Description
37528 \begin_inset space ~
37531 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
37532 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
37534 \begin_inset space ~
37538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37540 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
37547 \begin_layout Description
37549 \begin_inset space ~
37552 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
37553 \begin_inset space ~
37557 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37559 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
37566 \begin_layout Description
37568 \begin_inset space ~
37572 \begin_inset space ~
37575 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
37576 \begin_inset space ~
37580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37582 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
37589 \begin_layout Subsection
37593 \begin_layout Standard
37594 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
37598 \begin_inset space ~
37619 are described in section
37620 \begin_inset space ~
37624 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37626 reference "sec:toc"
37635 is described in section
37636 \begin_inset space ~
37640 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37642 reference "sec:Index"
37650 is described in section
37651 \begin_inset space ~
37655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37657 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
37663 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37666 is described in section
37667 \begin_inset space ~
37671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37673 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
37680 \begin_layout Subsection
37684 \begin_layout Standard
37685 To insert floats, as described in section
37686 \begin_inset space ~
37690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37692 reference "sec:Floats"
37696 and in detail the chapter
37703 \begin_inset space ~
37711 \begin_layout Subsection
37715 \begin_layout Standard
37716 To insert notes, described in section
37717 \begin_inset space ~
37721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37723 reference "sec:Notes"
37730 \begin_layout Subsection
37734 \begin_layout Standard
37735 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
37737 Branches are described in section
37738 \begin_inset space ~
37742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37744 reference "sec:Branches"
37751 \begin_layout Subsection
37755 \begin_layout Standard
37756 Inserts document class-specific insets.
37757 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
37759 An example is the document class
37760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37767 with three custom insets.
37770 Flex insets and InsetLayout
37774 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
37780 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
37783 \begin_layout Subsection
37785 \begin_inset Index idx
37788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37797 \begin_layout Standard
37798 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
37800 For more information see chapter
37802 External Document Parts
37805 \begin_inset space ~
37811 \begin_layout Subsection
37813 \begin_inset Index idx
37816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37825 \begin_layout Standard
37826 Inserts a box in a certain style.
37827 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
37834 \begin_inset space ~
37842 \begin_layout Subsection
37846 \begin_layout Standard
37851 dialog as described in section
37852 \begin_inset space ~
37856 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37858 reference "sec:Bibliography"
37865 \begin_layout Subsection
37869 \begin_layout Standard
37874 as described in section
37875 \begin_inset space ~
37879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37881 reference "sec:Cross-References"
37888 \begin_layout Subsection
37892 \begin_layout Standard
37897 as described in section
37898 \begin_inset space ~
37902 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37904 reference "sec:Cross-References"
37911 \begin_layout Subsection
37913 \begin_inset Index idx
37916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37923 \begin_inset Index idx
37926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37927 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
37935 \begin_layout Standard
37936 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
37937 Floats are described in section
37938 \begin_inset space ~
37942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37944 reference "sec:Floats"
37948 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
37950 Multi-page Captions
37955 \begin_inset space ~
37963 \begin_layout Subsection
37967 \begin_layout Standard
37968 Inserts an index entry as described in section
37969 \begin_inset space ~
37973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37975 reference "sec:Index"
37982 \begin_layout Subsection
37986 \begin_layout Standard
37987 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
37988 \begin_inset space ~
37992 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37994 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
38001 \begin_layout Subsection
38005 \begin_layout Standard
38006 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
38007 Tables are described in section
38008 \begin_inset space ~
38012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38014 reference "sec:Tables"
38018 and in detail in the chapter
38025 \begin_inset space ~
38033 \begin_layout Subsection
38037 \begin_layout Standard
38043 Graphics are described in section
38044 \begin_inset space ~
38048 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38050 reference "sec:Graphics"
38057 \begin_layout Subsection
38061 \begin_layout Standard
38062 Inserts a URL as described in section
38063 \begin_inset space ~
38067 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38069 reference "subsec:URLs"
38076 \begin_layout Subsection
38080 \begin_layout Standard
38081 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
38082 \begin_inset space ~
38086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38088 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
38095 \begin_layout Subsection
38099 \begin_layout Standard
38100 Inserts a footnote as described in section
38101 \begin_inset space ~
38105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38107 reference "sec:Footnotes"
38114 \begin_layout Subsection
38118 \begin_layout Standard
38119 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
38120 \begin_inset space ~
38124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38126 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
38133 \begin_layout Subsection
38137 \begin_layout Standard
38138 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
38139 title or caption of a float.
38140 Inserts a short title as described in section
38141 \begin_inset space ~
38145 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38147 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
38154 \begin_layout Subsection
38159 \begin_layout Standard
38160 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
38161 Code box as described in section
38162 \begin_inset space ~
38166 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38168 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
38175 \begin_layout Subsection
38177 \begin_inset Index idx
38180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38189 \begin_layout Standard
38190 Inserts a program listings box.
38191 Program listings are explained in the chapter
38193 Program Code Listings
38198 \begin_inset space ~
38206 \begin_layout Subsection
38210 \begin_layout Standard
38211 Inserts the actual date.
38212 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
38216 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
38224 \begin_inset space ~
38232 \begin_layout Subsection
38236 \begin_layout Standard
38237 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
38238 \begin_inset space ~
38242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38244 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
38251 \begin_layout Section
38253 \begin_inset Index idx
38256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38265 \begin_layout Standard
38266 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
38267 \begin_inset space ~
38270 of the current document.
38271 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
38274 \begin_layout Subsection
38278 \begin_layout Standard
38279 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
38280 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
38281 to jump, for example, between section
38282 \begin_inset space ~
38286 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
38287 \begin_inset space ~
38290 2.5 and use the submenu
38293 \begin_inset space ~
38297 \begin_inset space ~
38304 \begin_inset space ~
38310 \begin_inset space ~
38314 \begin_inset space ~
38320 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
38324 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
38330 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
38333 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
38336 \begin_layout Standard
38337 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
38341 \begin_inset space ~
38346 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
38349 \begin_inset space ~
38354 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
38357 \begin_layout Subsection
38358 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
38361 \begin_layout Standard
38362 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
38366 \begin_layout Subsection
38370 \begin_layout Standard
38371 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
38372 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
38373 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
38377 \begin_inset space ~
38381 \begin_inset space ~
38389 \begin_layout Subsection
38393 \begin_layout Standard
38394 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
38397 The \SpecialChar LyX
38398 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
38400 \begin_inset space ~
38408 \begin_inset space ~
38413 manual for a detailed description.
38416 \begin_layout Section
38418 \begin_inset Index idx
38421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38430 \begin_layout Subsection
38434 \begin_layout Standard
38435 Change Tracking is described in section
38436 \begin_inset space ~
38440 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38442 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
38449 \begin_layout Subsection
38457 \begin_layout Standard
38458 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
38459 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
38460 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38462 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
38463 to the clipboard or update the view.
38464 \begin_inset Newline newline
38467 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38471 \begin_layout Standard
38474 Open Containing Directory
38476 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
38477 's temporary folder for the document.
38478 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
38479 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
38480 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
38481 For example some journals require to send the
38485 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
38489 \begin_layout Subsection
38490 Start Appendix Here
38493 \begin_layout Standard
38494 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
38495 as described in section
38496 \begin_inset space ~
38500 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38502 reference "sec:Appendices"
38509 \begin_layout Subsection
38511 \begin_inset space ~
38517 \begin_layout Standard
38518 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
38519 default output format for the document (menu
38521 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38522 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38523 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
38525 \begin_inset space ~
38529 \begin_inset space ~
38535 \begin_inset space ~
38539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38541 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
38545 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
38548 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38549 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38551 \begin_inset space ~
38554 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38556 \begin_inset space ~
38559 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38561 \begin_inset space ~
38565 \begin_inset space ~
38571 \begin_inset space ~
38575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38577 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38581 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
38582 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
38584 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38585 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38587 \begin_inset space ~
38590 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38592 \begin_inset space ~
38595 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38599 \begin_inset space ~
38603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38605 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38610 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
38611 when it is first configured.
38612 The default output format is
38615 \begin_inset space ~
38623 \begin_layout Subsection
38624 View (Other Formats)
38627 \begin_layout Standard
38628 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
38629 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
38630 actual document with an external program.
38631 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
38632 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38633 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
38635 All possible formats are listed in section
38636 \begin_inset space ~
38640 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38642 reference "subsec:Export"
38647 You should at least see the menu entry
38652 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38654 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
38656 \begin_inset space ~
38660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38662 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38667 \begin_inset Index idx
38670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38671 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38680 \begin_layout Standard
38681 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
38682 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
38684 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38685 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38687 \begin_inset space ~
38690 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38692 \begin_inset space ~
38695 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38699 \begin_inset space ~
38703 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38705 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38710 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
38711 when it is first configured.
38714 \begin_layout Subsection
38716 \begin_inset space ~
38722 \begin_layout Standard
38723 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
38724 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
38727 \begin_layout Subsection
38728 Update (Other Formats)
38731 \begin_layout Standard
38732 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
38733 your document without opening a new viewer window.
38736 \begin_layout Subsection
38737 View Master Document
38740 \begin_layout Standard
38741 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
38743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38757 \begin_inset space ~
38762 manual for more information on this topic).
38763 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
38764 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
38768 \begin_inset space ~
38772 \begin_inset space ~
38777 generates the output of the whole book, while
38781 will just output the chapter alone.
38784 \begin_layout Standard
38785 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
38786 in the document settings (menu
38788 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38789 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38790 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
38792 \begin_inset space ~
38796 \begin_inset space ~
38802 \begin_inset space ~
38806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38808 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
38812 ) or in the preferences (menu
38814 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38815 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38817 \begin_inset space ~
38820 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38822 \begin_inset space ~
38825 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38827 \begin_inset space ~
38831 \begin_inset space ~
38837 \begin_inset space ~
38841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38843 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38850 \begin_layout Subsection
38851 Update Master Document
38854 \begin_layout Standard
38855 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
38857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38871 \begin_inset space ~
38876 manual for more information on this topic).
38877 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
38878 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
38881 \begin_layout Standard
38882 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
38883 in the document settings (menu
38885 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38886 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38887 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
38889 \begin_inset space ~
38893 \begin_inset space ~
38899 \begin_inset space ~
38903 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38905 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
38909 ) or in the preferences (menu
38911 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38912 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38914 \begin_inset space ~
38917 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38919 \begin_inset space ~
38922 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38924 \begin_inset space ~
38928 \begin_inset space ~
38934 \begin_inset space ~
38938 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38940 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38947 \begin_layout Subsection
38949 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38951 name "subsec:Compressed"
38958 \begin_layout Standard
38959 Un/compresses the current document.
38960 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
38961 compression (see the
38963 Additional Features
38965 manual for details).
38968 \begin_layout Subsection
38972 \begin_layout Standard
38973 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
38976 \begin_layout Subsection
38980 \begin_layout Standard
38981 The document settings are described in appendix
38982 \begin_inset space ~
38986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38988 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
38995 \begin_layout Section
38997 \begin_inset Index idx
39000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39009 \begin_layout Subsection
39013 \begin_layout Standard
39014 Spell checking is explained in section
39015 \begin_inset space ~
39019 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39021 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
39028 \begin_layout Subsection
39032 \begin_layout Standard
39033 The thesaurus is described in section
39034 \begin_inset space ~
39038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39040 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
39047 \begin_layout Subsection
39049 \begin_inset Index idx
39052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39059 \begin_inset Index idx
39062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39071 \begin_layout Standard
39072 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
39073 the highlighted document part.
39076 \begin_layout Subsection
39082 \begin_inset Index idx
39085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39086 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
39095 \begin_layout Standard
39096 Generates with the help of the program
39098 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
39101 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
39102 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
39103 This feature is not available on Windows.
39106 \begin_layout Subsection
39112 \begin_inset Index idx
39115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39125 \begin_layout Standard
39126 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39131 \begin_inset space ~
39136 to see the full filename paths.
39139 \begin_layout Subsection
39141 \begin_inset Index idx
39144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39153 \begin_layout Standard
39154 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
39155 files as described in section
39156 \begin_inset space ~
39160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39162 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
39169 \begin_layout Subsection
39171 \begin_inset Index idx
39174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39187 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39205 \begin_inset Index idx
39208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39209 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39218 \begin_layout Standard
39219 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
39220 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
39221 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39222 -packages and programs it needs; see
39224 \begin_inset space ~
39228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39230 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39237 \begin_layout Subsection
39241 \begin_layout Standard
39246 dialog as described in detail in appendix
39247 \begin_inset space ~
39251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39253 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
39260 \begin_layout Section
39262 \begin_inset Index idx
39265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39274 \begin_layout Standard
39275 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
39276 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
39278 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
39282 \begin_layout Standard
39286 \begin_inset space ~
39291 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
39292 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39293 packages and classes found
39294 by \SpecialChar LyX
39296 \begin_inset space ~
39300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39302 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
39309 \begin_layout Standard
39313 \begin_inset space ~
39318 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
39323 \begin_layout Section
39325 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39327 name "sec:Toolbars"
39334 \begin_layout Standard
39335 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
39336 \begin_inset space ~
39340 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39342 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
39349 \begin_layout Standard
39350 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
39351 This is described in the
39353 Additional Features
39358 \begin_layout Subsection
39360 \begin_inset Index idx
39363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39372 \begin_layout Standard
39373 \begin_inset Graphics
39374 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
39382 \begin_layout Standard
39383 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39389 \begin_layout Standard
39390 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39407 \begin_inset Note Note
39410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39411 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
39416 manual for more information.
39424 \begin_layout Standard
39425 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39431 \begin_layout Standard
39432 \begin_inset Tabular
39433 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
39434 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39435 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
39436 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
39438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39442 \begin_inset Graphics
39443 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
39453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39457 pull-down box for the environments
39470 \begin_layout Standard
39471 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
39477 \begin_layout Standard
39479 \begin_inset Tabular
39480 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
39481 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39482 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39483 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39484 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39507 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39514 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39537 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39544 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39567 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39574 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39583 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
39591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39597 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39604 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39613 arg "spelling-continuously"
39621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39625 Spellcheck continuously
39631 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39654 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39661 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39684 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39691 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39714 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39721 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39744 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39751 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39774 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39781 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39790 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
39798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39804 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39806 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39810 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39814 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39823 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39830 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
39838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39844 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39846 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39850 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39854 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39863 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39872 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
39880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39886 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
39887 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
39894 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39915 Emphasize text, function of the
39917 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39919 \begin_inset space ~
39922 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39931 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39952 Set text to noun style, function of the
39954 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39956 \begin_inset space ~
39959 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39968 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39977 arg "textstyle-apply"
39985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39989 Format text using the current settings in the
39991 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39993 \begin_inset space ~
39996 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
40005 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40028 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40029 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
40031 \begin_inset space ~
40040 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40049 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
40057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40063 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40070 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40077 arg "tabular-insert"
40085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40091 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40098 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40107 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
40115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40119 Toggle outline window on/off,
40121 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
40128 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40137 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
40145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40149 Toggle math toolbar on/off
40155 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40164 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
40172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40176 Toggle table toolbar on/off
40189 \begin_layout Subsection
40191 \begin_inset Index idx
40194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40203 \begin_layout Standard
40204 \begin_inset Graphics
40205 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
40213 \begin_layout Standard
40214 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40220 \begin_layout Standard
40221 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40225 \begin_layout Standard
40226 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40232 \begin_layout Standard
40233 \begin_inset Tabular
40234 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
40235 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40236 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40237 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40238 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40265 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40274 arg "layout Enumerate"
40282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40292 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40301 arg "layout Itemize"
40309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40319 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40346 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40355 arg "layout Description"
40363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40373 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40382 arg "depth-increment"
40390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40396 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40398 \begin_inset space ~
40402 \begin_inset space ~
40411 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40420 arg "depth-decrement"
40428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40434 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40436 \begin_inset space ~
40440 \begin_inset space ~
40449 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40458 arg "float-insert figure"
40466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40472 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40473 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
40480 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40489 arg "float-insert table"
40497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40503 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40504 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
40511 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40534 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40541 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40550 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
40558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40564 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40571 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40580 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
40588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40594 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40601 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40624 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40626 \begin_inset space ~
40635 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40644 arg "nomencl-insert"
40652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40658 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40660 \begin_inset space ~
40669 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40678 arg "footnote-insert"
40686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40692 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40699 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40708 arg "marginalnote-insert"
40716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40722 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40724 \begin_inset space ~
40733 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40756 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40757 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
40759 \begin_inset space ~
40768 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40777 arg "box-insert Frameless"
40785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40791 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40798 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40821 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40828 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40851 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40853 \begin_inset space ~
40862 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40871 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
40879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40885 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40886 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
40893 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40902 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
40910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40916 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40917 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40919 \begin_inset space ~
40928 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40937 arg "dialog-show character"
40945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40951 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40953 \begin_inset space ~
40956 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
40963 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40972 arg "layout-paragraph"
40980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40986 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40988 \begin_inset space ~
40997 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41006 arg "thesaurus-entry"
41014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41020 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41034 \begin_layout Subsection
41035 View/Update Toolbar
41036 \begin_inset Index idx
41039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41040 Toolbar ! View / Update
41048 \begin_layout Standard
41049 \begin_inset Graphics
41050 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
41057 \begin_layout Standard
41058 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41064 \begin_layout Standard
41065 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41069 \begin_layout Standard
41070 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41076 \begin_layout Standard
41077 \begin_inset Tabular
41078 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
41079 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41080 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41081 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41082 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41105 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41112 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41121 arg "buffer-update"
41129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41135 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41142 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41151 arg "master-buffer-view"
41159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41165 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41167 \begin_inset space ~
41176 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41185 arg "master-buffer-update"
41193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41199 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41201 \begin_inset space ~
41205 \begin_inset space ~
41214 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41223 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
41231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41237 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41238 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41239 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41240 Synchronize with Output
41246 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41269 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41270 View (Other Formats)
41276 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41283 arg "update-others"
41291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41297 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41298 Update (Other Formats)
41311 \begin_layout Standard
41312 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
41316 \begin_layout Subsection
41320 \begin_layout Standard
41321 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
41322 \begin_inset space ~
41326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41328 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
41332 , the table toolbar
41333 \begin_inset Index idx
41336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41345 \begin_inset space ~
41350 manual and the math macro toolbar
41351 \begin_inset Index idx
41354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41367 \begin_layout Chapter
41368 The Document Settings
41369 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41371 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
41376 \begin_inset Index idx
41379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41380 Document ! Settings
41388 \begin_layout Standard
41392 \begin_inset space ~
41397 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
41398 is called with the menu
41400 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41404 You can save your document settings as default with the
41406 Save as Document Defaults
41408 button in any dialog.
41409 This will create a template named
41413 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
41414 when you create a new document without
41418 \begin_layout Standard
41423 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
41424 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
41427 \begin_layout Standard
41428 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
41429 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
41430 to find the one you are looking for.
41431 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
41432 the submenus of the dialog.
41434 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41438 \begin_inset space \space{}
41442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41449 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
41450 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
41451 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
41454 \begin_layout Section
41458 \begin_layout Standard
41459 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
41461 Document classes are described in section
41462 \begin_inset space ~
41466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41468 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
41476 \begin_layout Standard
41480 \begin_inset space ~
41485 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
41490 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
41491 as a layout for a document class.
41492 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
41494 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
41503 \begin_layout Standard
41504 Some classes use special class options by default.
41505 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
41509 and you can decide to use them or not.
41510 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
41511 recommended you leave them untouched.
41516 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41517 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
41522 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41524 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
41529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41530 When you want to use one of the following drivers
41531 \begin_inset Newline newline
41536 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
41539 \begin_inset Newline newline
41542 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41543 distribution, see section
41548 \begin_inset CommandInset href
41550 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
41562 \begin_layout Standard
41567 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
41568 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
41569 in the background if the child document
41570 is opened without its master.
41571 This way child documents are always compilable.
41572 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
41579 \begin_inset space ~
41587 \begin_layout Standard
41588 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41599 \begin_inset Index idx
41602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41604 -packages ! prettyref
41610 \begin_inset Index idx
41613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41615 -packages ! refstyle
41620 for cross-references, see section
41621 \begin_inset space ~
41625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41627 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41634 \begin_layout Section
41638 \begin_layout Standard
41639 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
41640 Please refer to the section
41643 \begin_inset space ~
41651 \begin_inset space ~
41656 manual for details.
41659 \begin_layout Section
41663 \begin_layout Standard
41664 Modules are explained in section
41665 \begin_inset space ~
41669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41671 reference "subsec:Modules"
41678 \begin_layout Section
41682 \begin_layout Standard
41684 \begin_inset space ~
41688 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41690 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
41697 \begin_layout Section
41701 \begin_layout Standard
41702 The document font settings are described in section
41703 \begin_inset space ~
41707 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41709 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
41716 \begin_layout Section
41720 \begin_layout Standard
41721 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
41733 \begin_inset space ~
41738 and whether it should be a
41741 \begin_inset space ~
41746 can also be specified here.
41749 \begin_layout Standard
41750 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
41751 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
41752 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
41754 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
41757 \begin_layout Standard
41760 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
41763 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
41764 justifies the text on screen.
41765 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
41769 \begin_layout Section
41773 \begin_layout Standard
41774 This dialog is described in sections
41775 \begin_inset space ~
41779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41781 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
41786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41788 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
41795 \begin_layout Section
41799 \begin_layout Standard
41800 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
41801 \begin_inset space ~
41805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41807 reference "subsec:Margins"
41814 \begin_layout Section
41816 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41818 name "sec:Language-encodings"
41823 \begin_inset Index idx
41826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41827 Language ! Encoding
41835 \begin_layout Standard
41836 The document language and quote styles are set here.
41837 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
41838 (the \SpecialChar LyX
41840 is always encoded in utf8).
41841 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
41842 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
41843 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
41844 -command is not known for
41845 a particular character).
41848 \begin_layout Standard
41849 If you use the option
41854 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
41855 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
41856 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41858 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
41859 exactly one encoding.
41860 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
41863 \begin_layout Standard
41865 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
41866 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
41867 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41868 installation supports Unicode), choose
41869 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
41870 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
41871 is quite incomplete, so
41872 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
41877 (when \SpecialChar LyX
41878 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
41879 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
41880 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
41881 -commands is not used, because all
41882 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
41883 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41884 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41885 , two new alternative engines
41886 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
41888 Both engines support Unicode natively.
41890 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
41893 \begin_inset space ~
41901 \begin_inset space ~
41909 \begin_inset space ~
41915 \begin_inset space ~
41919 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41921 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
41926 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
41930 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
41933 \begin_layout Standard
41937 \begin_inset space ~
41942 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41943 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
41945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41953 The possible settings are:
41956 \begin_layout Description
41957 Default uses the language package that is selected in
41959 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41960 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41964 \begin_inset space ~
41968 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41970 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
41977 \begin_layout Description
41978 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
41979 format you will use.
41980 In many cases this will be
41985 \begin_inset Index idx
41988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41996 If the newer package
42001 \begin_inset Index idx
42004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42006 -packages ! polyglossia
42011 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
42012 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
42013 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
42015 this package will be used instead of
42022 \begin_layout Description
42024 \begin_inset space ~
42035 would be more appropriate.
42038 \begin_layout Description
42039 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
42040 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
42044 (for German texts), type in
42047 \begin_inset Newline newline
42052 usepackage{ngerman}
42055 \begin_layout Description
42056 None will not use a language package.
42057 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
42060 \begin_layout Standard
42061 Here is a list with the important encodings:
42064 \begin_layout Description
42066 \begin_inset space ~
42070 \begin_inset space ~
42074 \begin_inset space ~
42081 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42087 \begin_inset Index idx
42090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42092 -packages ! inputenc
42098 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
42099 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
42100 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
42104 \begin_layout Description
42105 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
42107 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
42108 commands, which may result in a big
42109 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
42110 -commands are needed.
42113 \begin_layout Description
42115 \begin_inset space ~
42119 \begin_inset space ~
42122 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
42125 \begin_layout Description
42127 \begin_inset space ~
42131 \begin_inset space ~
42134 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
42137 \begin_layout Description
42139 \begin_inset space ~
42142 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
42145 \begin_layout Description
42147 \begin_inset space ~
42151 \begin_inset space ~
42154 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
42155 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
42158 \begin_layout Description
42160 \begin_inset space ~
42164 \begin_inset space ~
42167 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
42171 \begin_layout Description
42173 \begin_inset space ~
42177 \begin_inset space ~
42180 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
42181 ISO-8859-13 encoding
42184 \begin_layout Description
42186 \begin_inset space ~
42190 \begin_inset space ~
42194 \begin_inset space ~
42197 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
42198 \begin_inset space ~
42204 \begin_layout Description
42206 \begin_inset space ~
42210 \begin_inset space ~
42214 \begin_inset space ~
42217 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
42218 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
42221 \begin_layout Description
42223 \begin_inset space ~
42227 \begin_inset space ~
42230 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
42231 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
42232 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42233 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
42234 \begin_inset space ~
42238 \begin_inset space ~
42244 \begin_layout Description
42246 \begin_inset space ~
42250 \begin_inset space ~
42253 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
42254 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
42255 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42257 should try to use the encoding Unicode
42258 \begin_inset space ~
42262 \begin_inset space ~
42268 \begin_layout Description
42270 \begin_inset space ~
42274 \begin_inset space ~
42277 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
42280 \begin_layout Description
42282 \begin_inset space ~
42286 \begin_inset space ~
42289 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
42292 \begin_layout Description
42294 \begin_inset space ~
42298 \begin_inset space ~
42301 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
42304 \begin_layout Description
42306 \begin_inset space ~
42309 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
42312 \begin_layout Description
42314 \begin_inset space ~
42317 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
42320 \begin_layout Description
42322 \begin_inset space ~
42326 \begin_inset space ~
42329 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
42332 \begin_layout Description
42334 \begin_inset space ~
42338 \begin_inset space ~
42344 \begin_layout Description
42346 \begin_inset space ~
42350 \begin_inset space ~
42353 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
42356 \begin_layout Description
42358 \begin_inset space ~
42362 \begin_inset space ~
42368 \begin_layout Description
42370 \begin_inset space ~
42374 \begin_inset space ~
42377 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42383 \begin_inset Index idx
42386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42393 , when using this, set the document language to
42398 \begin_layout Description
42400 \begin_inset space ~
42404 \begin_inset space ~
42407 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42412 , when using this, set the document language to
42415 \begin_inset space ~
42421 \begin_layout Description
42423 \begin_inset space ~
42427 \begin_inset space ~
42430 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42436 \begin_inset Index idx
42439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42441 -packages ! japanese
42446 , when using this, set the document language to
42451 \begin_layout Description
42453 \begin_inset space ~
42457 \begin_inset space ~
42460 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42465 , when using this, set the document language to
42470 \begin_layout Description
42472 \begin_inset space ~
42476 \begin_inset space ~
42479 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42484 , when using this, set the document language to
42489 \begin_layout Description
42491 \begin_inset space ~
42494 (EUC-KR) for Korean
42497 \begin_layout Description
42499 \begin_inset space ~
42503 \begin_inset space ~
42507 \begin_inset space ~
42510 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
42513 \begin_layout Description
42515 \begin_inset space ~
42519 \begin_inset space ~
42523 \begin_inset space ~
42526 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
42527 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
42528 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
42531 \begin_layout Description
42533 \begin_inset space ~
42537 \begin_inset space ~
42543 \begin_layout Description
42545 \begin_inset space ~
42549 \begin_inset space ~
42552 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
42553 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
42556 \begin_layout Description
42558 \begin_inset space ~
42562 \begin_inset space ~
42565 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42571 \begin_inset Index idx
42574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42581 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
42584 \begin_layout Description
42586 \begin_inset space ~
42594 \begin_inset space ~
42597 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
42604 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
42607 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42614 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
42615 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
42617 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
42620 \begin_layout Description
42622 \begin_inset space ~
42626 \begin_inset space ~
42629 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42635 \begin_inset Index idx
42638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42645 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
42648 \begin_layout Description
42650 \begin_inset space ~
42653 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42659 \begin_inset Index idx
42662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42664 -packages ! inputenc
42670 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
42674 \begin_layout Description
42676 \begin_inset space ~
42680 \begin_inset space ~
42684 \begin_inset space ~
42687 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
42688 \begin_inset space ~
42694 \begin_layout Description
42696 \begin_inset space ~
42700 \begin_inset space ~
42704 \begin_inset space ~
42707 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
42708 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
42709 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
42713 \begin_layout Description
42715 \begin_inset space ~
42719 \begin_inset space ~
42723 \begin_inset space ~
42726 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
42727 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
42730 \begin_layout Section
42732 \begin_inset Index idx
42735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42742 \begin_inset Index idx
42745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42752 \begin_inset Index idx
42755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42756 Color ! Shaded boxes
42762 \begin_inset Index idx
42765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42766 Color ! Greyed-out notes
42774 \begin_layout Standard
42775 Here you can alter the font color for the
42779 (default: black), for
42782 \begin_inset space ~
42787 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
42791 (default: white) and for
42794 \begin_inset space ~
42804 sets the color back to the default.
42807 \begin_layout Standard
42808 Clicking any button showing
42816 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
42817 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
42818 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
42819 later more quickly.
42822 \begin_layout Standard
42823 Note, if you change the
42826 \begin_inset space ~
42831 font color and use the option
42834 \begin_inset space ~
42839 in the document settings under
42842 \begin_inset space ~
42847 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
42848 \begin_inset space ~
42852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42854 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
42861 \begin_layout Standard
42862 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
42868 \begin_layout Standard
42872 \begin_inset space ~
42881 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
42884 \begin_inset space ~
42887 Code after a forced page break:
42890 \begin_layout Itemize
42891 For the page color:
42892 \begin_inset Newline newline
42899 pagecolor{color name}
42902 \begin_layout Itemize
42903 For the text color:
42904 \begin_inset Newline newline
42914 \begin_layout Standard
42915 You are restricted to one of
42951 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
42958 \begin_inset space ~
42964 \begin_inset Newline newline
42967 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
42968 names to refer to them:
42971 \begin_layout Itemize
42977 \begin_inset Newline newline
42982 page_backgroundcolor
42985 \begin_layout Itemize
42989 \begin_inset space ~
42995 \begin_inset Newline newline
43003 \begin_layout Itemize
43007 \begin_inset space ~
43013 \begin_inset Newline newline
43021 \begin_layout Itemize
43025 \begin_inset space ~
43031 \begin_inset Newline newline
43039 \begin_layout Standard
43040 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
43043 \begin_inset space ~
43051 \begin_inset space ~
43059 \begin_layout Section
43063 \begin_layout Standard
43064 Here you can adjust the
43068 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
43072 as described in section
43073 \begin_inset space ~
43077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43079 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
43086 \begin_layout Section
43090 \begin_layout Standard
43091 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43097 \begin_inset Index idx
43100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43112 \begin_inset Index idx
43115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43117 -packages ! jurabib
43125 Sectioned bibliography
43127 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43133 \begin_inset Index idx
43136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43138 -packages ! bibtopic
43143 and you can select a
43147 for the generation of the bibliography.
43148 For a further description see section
43149 \begin_inset space ~
43153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43155 reference "sec:Bibliography"
43162 \begin_layout Section
43166 \begin_layout Standard
43167 Here you can define the
43171 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
43173 \begin_inset space ~
43177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43179 reference "sec:Index"
43186 \begin_layout Section
43190 \begin_layout Standard
43191 The PDF properties are explained in section
43192 \begin_inset space ~
43196 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43198 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
43205 \begin_layout Section
43209 \begin_layout Standard
43210 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
43211 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43217 \begin_inset Index idx
43220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43222 -packages ! amsmath
43232 \begin_inset Index idx
43235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43237 -packages ! amssymb
43247 \begin_inset Index idx
43250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43262 \begin_inset Index idx
43265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43277 \begin_inset Index idx
43280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43282 -packages ! mathdots
43292 \begin_inset Index idx
43295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43297 -packages ! mathtools
43307 \begin_inset Index idx
43310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43322 \begin_inset Index idx
43325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43327 -packages ! stackrel
43337 \begin_inset Index idx
43340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43342 -packages ! stmaryrd
43352 \begin_inset Index idx
43355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43357 -packages ! undertilde
43362 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
43365 \begin_layout Description
43366 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
43367 -errors in formulas,
43368 ensure that you have this enabled.
43371 \begin_layout Description
43372 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
43373 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
43374 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
43378 \begin_layout Description
43379 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
43382 \begin_inset space ~
43394 \begin_layout Description
43395 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
43398 \begin_inset space ~
43410 \begin_layout Description
43411 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
43422 \begin_layout Description
43423 mathtools is used for the math commands
43459 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
43466 \begin_layout Description
43467 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
43469 Chemical Symbols and Equations
43478 \begin_layout Description
43479 stackrel is used for the math command
43496 \begin_layout Description
43497 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
43500 \begin_layout Description
43501 undertilde is used for the math command
43509 Accents for one Character
43518 \begin_layout Section
43522 \begin_layout Standard
43523 The float placement options are described in the section
43526 \begin_inset space ~
43534 \begin_inset space ~
43542 \begin_layout Section
43546 \begin_layout Standard
43547 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
43549 Program Code Listings
43554 \begin_inset space ~
43562 \begin_layout Section
43566 \begin_layout Standard
43567 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
43575 set to be used and set the
43580 The itemize environment is described in section
43581 \begin_inset space ~
43585 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43587 reference "sec:Itemize"
43594 \begin_layout Standard
43595 You can furthermore specify a
43598 \begin_inset space ~
43603 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43604 command of the desired character.
43605 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
43612 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
43614 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43618 \begin_inset space \space{}
43622 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
43632 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
43633 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
43636 \begin_layout Standard
43637 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43645 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
43646 -packages in the preamble (menu
43649 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43650 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43653 \begin_inset space ~
43659 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
43663 usepackage{textcomp}
43666 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
43670 usepackage{amssymb}
43680 \begin_layout Section
43684 \begin_layout Standard
43685 Branches are described in section
43686 \begin_inset space ~
43690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43692 reference "sec:Branches"
43699 \begin_layout Section
43701 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43703 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
43710 \begin_layout Standard
43711 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
43714 \begin_layout Description
43716 \begin_inset space ~
43720 \begin_inset space ~
43723 Format: The format that is used when you enter
43724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43743 View Master Document
43744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43751 Update Master Document
43752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43759 menu or the toolbar.
43760 The default is set in
43762 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43763 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43765 \begin_inset space ~
43768 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43772 \begin_inset space ~
43776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43778 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43785 \begin_layout Description
43787 \begin_inset space ~
43791 \begin_inset space ~
43794 Output settings for the menu
43796 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43798 \begin_inset space ~
43804 For a detailed description see section
43806 Reverse DVI/PDF search
43811 \begin_inset space ~
43819 \begin_layout Description
43821 \begin_inset space ~
43825 \begin_inset space ~
43828 Options offers settings for the export format
43836 \begin_inset space ~
43841 will assure that the output follows exactly version
43842 \begin_inset space ~
43845 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
43849 \begin_inset space ~
43854 settings are described in detail in section
43856 Math Output in XHTML
43861 \begin_inset space ~
43870 \begin_inset space ~
43874 \begin_inset space ~
43879 is used for the size of equations in the output.
43882 \begin_layout Description
43884 \begin_inset space ~
43889 Save transient properties
43891 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
43892 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
43893 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
43897 \begin_layout Itemize
43898 the activation of change tracking
43901 \begin_layout Itemize
43902 the output of tracked changes
43905 \begin_layout Itemize
43906 the recording of the document directory path.
43909 \begin_layout Standard
43910 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
43911 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
43915 \begin_layout Section
43923 \begin_layout Standard
43924 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
43926 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
43928 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43930 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
43934 \begin_layout Standard
43935 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43936 -syntax is given in section
43937 \begin_inset space ~
43941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43943 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
43950 \begin_layout Chapter
43956 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43958 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
43963 \begin_inset Index idx
43966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43975 \begin_layout Standard
43976 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
43978 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43982 It has the following submenus.
43985 \begin_layout Section
43989 \begin_layout Subsection
43993 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43994 User Interface File
43995 \begin_inset Index idx
43998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43999 Customization ! of toolbars
44005 \begin_inset Index idx
44008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44009 Customization ! of menus
44017 \begin_layout Standard
44018 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
44019 interface (ui) file.
44020 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
44028 \begin_layout Description
44033 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
44036 \begin_layout Description
44043 the menu entries in popup context menus
44046 \begin_layout Description
44051 specifies the toolbar buttons
44054 \begin_layout Standard
44055 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
44056 and edit the entries.
44059 \begin_layout Standard
44060 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
44072 entries must be finished with an explicit
44097 and in the case of the
44098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44110 The syntax for the entries is:
44113 \begin_layout Standard
44114 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
44120 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44143 \begin_layout Standard
44145 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
44148 All the \SpecialChar LyX
44149 -functions are listed in the menu
44151 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
44153 \begin_inset space ~
44161 \begin_layout Standard
44162 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
44168 \begin_layout Standard
44169 For example, assuming you use the menu
44171 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44174 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
44178 \begin_layout Standard
44179 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
44185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44203 \begin_layout Standard
44205 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
44209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44220 to have the sixth bookmark.
44223 \begin_layout Standard
44227 \begin_inset space ~
44232 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
44233 's toolbar buttons.
44234 The currently available icon sets are compared in
44235 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44238 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
44245 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44249 \begin_layout Standard
44252 Enable tool tips in main work area
44254 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
44258 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44262 \begin_layout Standard
44267 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
44268 should display in the menu
44270 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44272 \begin_inset space ~
44280 \begin_layout Subsection
44284 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44288 \begin_layout Standard
44291 Restore window layouts and geometries
44294 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
44295 the last \SpecialChar LyX
44299 \begin_layout Standard
44302 Restore cursor positions
44304 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
44308 \begin_layout Standard
44311 Load opened files from last session
44313 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
44317 \begin_layout Standard
44320 Clear all session information
44322 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
44323 sessions (cursor positions, names
44324 of last opened documents, etc.).
44327 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44329 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44331 name "subsec:Backup documents"
44336 \begin_inset Index idx
44339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44348 \begin_layout Standard
44351 Backup original documents when saving
44353 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
44354 it was saved the last time.
44355 It is stored in the
44358 \begin_inset space ~
44364 \begin_inset space ~
44368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44370 reference "sec:Paths"
44374 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
44377 \begin_inset space ~
44383 The backup file has the file extension
44384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44398 \begin_layout Standard
44401 Backup documents, every
44403 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
44406 \begin_layout Standard
44409 Save documents compressed by default
44411 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
44412 \begin_inset space ~
44416 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44418 reference "subsec:Compressed"
44423 This applies to newly created documents only.
44424 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
44427 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44428 Windows & work area
44431 \begin_layout Standard
44434 Open documents in tabs
44436 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
44440 \begin_layout Standard
44445 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
44450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44452 \begin_inset space ~
44456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44458 reference "sec:Paths"
44462 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
44469 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
44470 documents will be opened in the same running instance
44471 of \SpecialChar LyX
44473 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
44474 instance is created for each file.
44477 \begin_layout Standard
44480 Single close-tab button
44482 is checked, there will only be one close button (
44492 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
44493 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
44495 \change_inserted 274215730 1469338548
44496 Regardless of this option, one may always close a tab by middle-clicking
44502 \begin_layout Standard
44503 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44511 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
44512 before the change takes effect.
44520 \begin_layout Standard
44525 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
44527 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
44529 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
44533 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
44534 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
44535 and only want to close the view in once instance.
44538 \begin_layout Subsection
44540 \begin_inset Index idx
44543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44550 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44552 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
44559 \begin_layout Standard
44560 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
44564 \begin_layout Standard
44565 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44573 This section only deals with the fonts
44577 the \SpecialChar LyX
44579 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
44582 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44583 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44594 \begin_layout Standard
44595 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
44612 (depends on the system) as its
44615 \begin_inset space ~
44631 \begin_layout Standard
44632 You can change the font size with the
44639 \begin_layout Standard
44644 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
44646 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44649 points have the size of 1
44650 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44654 \begin_inset space ~
44658 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44660 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
44665 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
44666 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44670 The sizes are explained in detail in section
44671 \begin_inset space ~
44675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44677 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
44684 \begin_layout Standard
44687 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
44689 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
44690 needs to redraw the screen less often.
44691 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
44692 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
44693 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
44695 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
44696 \begin_inset space ~
44702 \begin_layout Subsection
44704 \begin_inset Index idx
44707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44708 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
44715 \begin_inset Index idx
44718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44727 \begin_layout Standard
44728 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
44729 by choosing an item in the
44730 list and selecting the
44737 \begin_layout Standard
44738 By checking the option
44742 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
44745 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
44746 \begin_inset space ~
44750 \begin_inset space ~
44755 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
44758 \begin_layout Subsection
44760 \begin_inset Index idx
44763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44772 \begin_layout Standard
44773 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
44777 \begin_layout Standard
44782 enables previewing snippets of your document.
44783 This feature is described in section
44784 \begin_inset space ~
44788 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44790 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
44797 \begin_layout Standard
44798 Checking the option
44801 \begin_inset space ~
44805 \begin_inset space ~
44809 \begin_inset space ~
44814 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
44817 \begin_layout Section
44819 \begin_inset Index idx
44822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44831 \begin_layout Subsection
44835 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44839 \begin_layout Standard
44842 Cursor follows scrollbar
44844 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
44848 \begin_layout Standard
44849 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
44850 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
44851 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
44854 \begin_layout Standard
44857 Scroll below end of document
44859 is self-explanatory.
44862 \begin_layout Standard
44863 In \SpecialChar LyX
44864 one can jump from word to word by pressing
44871 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
44873 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
44874 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
44877 \begin_layout Standard
44880 Sort environments alphabetically
44882 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
44885 \begin_layout Standard
44888 Group environments by their category
44890 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
44893 \begin_layout Standard
44898 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
44909 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44913 \begin_layout Standard
44914 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
44919 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
44920 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
44924 \begin_layout Subsection
44926 \begin_inset Index idx
44929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44936 \begin_inset Index idx
44939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44940 Settings ! Shortcuts
44948 \begin_layout Standard
44953 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
44955 Several binding files are available, among them:
44958 \begin_layout Description
44959 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
44962 \begin_layout Description
44963 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
44975 \begin_layout Description
44976 mac.bind a set of bindings for
44979 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44987 \begin_layout Standard
44988 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
44993 , and binding files for special languages.
44994 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
44995 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44999 \begin_inset space \space{}
45003 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45011 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
45012 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
45013 will try to use the appropriate binding
45017 \begin_layout Standard
45018 Some binding files, like
45022 , only have a limited scope.
45023 When looking at the end of the file
45027 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
45030 \begin_layout Standard
45034 \begin_inset space ~
45038 \begin_inset space ~
45043 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
45044 in the selected key binding file.
45047 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45049 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45051 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
45056 \begin_inset Index idx
45059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45060 Key Bindings ! Editing
45068 \begin_layout Standard
45069 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
45070 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
45071 functions and the bound shortcuts.
45072 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
45075 Show key-bindings containing
45078 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
45079 Insert there for example as keyword
45080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45087 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
45088 functions that contain
45089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45097 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
45098 All \SpecialChar LyX
45099 functions are also listed in the file
45104 that you will find in the
45111 \begin_layout Standard
45112 For example, to add the shortcut
45120 , select the function and press the
45125 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
45126 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
45129 \begin_layout Standard
45130 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
45131 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
45133 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
45134 function names as a semicolon separated list.
45136 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
45141 \begin_layout Standard
45142 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
45145 \begin_layout Standard
45146 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
45148 The syntax of the entries is:
45151 \begin_layout Standard
45157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45176 \begin_layout Subsection
45178 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45180 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
45185 \begin_inset Index idx
45188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45195 \begin_inset Index idx
45198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45199 Settings ! Keyboard Map
45207 \begin_layout Standard
45208 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
45209 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
45210 provides keyboard maps.
45211 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
45212 is a Romanian one, you can enable
45215 \begin_inset space ~
45219 \begin_inset space ~
45224 and select the keyboard map file named
45231 \begin_layout Standard
45240 keyboard map and, if you use the
45244 bindings, you can select the first and second with
45247 arg "keymap-primary"
45253 arg "keymap-secondary"
45256 respectively or toggle between them with
45259 arg "keymap-toggle"
45265 \begin_layout Standard
45266 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45274 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
45283 \begin_layout Standard
45284 You can also specify the mouse
45286 Wheel scrolling speed
45289 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
45293 Middle mouse button pasting
45295 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
45296 inserts the content of the clipboard.
45299 \begin_layout Standard
45307 \begin_inset space ~
45311 \begin_inset space ~
45316 you can select a key for zooming.
45317 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
45320 \begin_layout Subsection
45324 \begin_layout Standard
45325 Input completion is described in section
45326 \begin_inset space ~
45330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45332 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
45339 \begin_layout Section
45341 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45348 \begin_inset Index idx
45351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45358 \begin_inset Index idx
45361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45370 \begin_layout Standard
45371 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
45372 are normally determined during
45374 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
45377 \begin_layout Description
45379 \begin_inset space ~
45382 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
45383 's working directory.
45384 It is the default when you
45395 \begin_inset space ~
45403 \begin_layout Description
45405 \begin_inset space ~
45408 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
45410 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45412 \begin_inset space ~
45416 \begin_inset space ~
45424 \begin_layout Description
45426 \begin_inset space ~
45429 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
45435 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45439 \begin_inset Newline newline
45443 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45455 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
45456 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
45464 \begin_layout Description
45466 \begin_inset space ~
45470 \begin_inset Index idx
45473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45479 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
45480 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
45481 \begin_inset space ~
45485 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45487 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
45495 will be used to save the backups.
45496 \begin_inset Newline newline
45499 Backup files have the ending
45500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45510 \begin_layout Description
45512 \begin_inset space ~
45515 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
45516 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
45518 \begin_inset Newline newline
45525 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
45531 You can edit this file with the program
45540 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
45541 in its preferences under
45544 \begin_inset space ~
45550 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
45555 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
45557 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
45558 in your \SpecialChar LyX
45564 and \SpecialChar LyX
45565 need to be running the same time.
45566 \begin_inset Newline newline
45569 The pipe is also used for the
45573 feature, see section
45574 \begin_inset space ~
45578 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45580 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
45585 \begin_inset Newline newline
45588 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
45589 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
45590 \begin_inset Newline newline
45606 \begin_layout Description
45608 \begin_inset space ~
45611 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
45614 \begin_layout Description
45616 \begin_inset space ~
45619 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
45620 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
45621 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
45624 \begin_layout Description
45626 \begin_inset space ~
45629 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
45635 You only need to specify it if you are using
45639 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
45641 For \SpecialChar LyX
45646 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
45650 \begin_layout Description
45652 \begin_inset space ~
45655 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
45656 When \SpecialChar LyX
45657 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
45658 to find it on the system.
45659 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
45661 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
45663 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45667 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45670 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
45671 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
45674 \begin_layout Description
45676 \begin_inset space ~
45679 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
45680 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
45681 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
45682 code or in the document
45684 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
45686 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
45687 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
45688 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
45689 scanned for the input files.
45690 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
45691 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
45693 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
45694 compilation may fail for some documents.
45697 \begin_layout Section
45701 \begin_layout Standard
45702 Here you can insert your
45711 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
45713 \begin_inset space ~
45717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45719 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
45723 , to mark changes you make as yours.
45726 \begin_layout Section
45728 \begin_inset Index idx
45731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45732 Language ! Settings
45738 \begin_inset Index idx
45741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45742 Settings ! Language
45750 \begin_layout Subsection
45752 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45754 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
45761 \begin_layout Description
45763 \begin_inset space ~
45767 \begin_inset space ~
45770 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
45772 You can find its actual translation status here:
45773 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45775 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
45782 \begin_layout Description
45784 \begin_inset space ~
45787 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
45788 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
45789 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
45790 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
45791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45807 The most widespread language package is
45812 \begin_inset Index idx
45815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45822 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
45824 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45825 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45826 come with the alternative
45832 \begin_inset Index idx
45835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45837 -packages ! polyglossia
45842 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
45843 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
45849 The available selections are described in section
45850 \begin_inset space ~
45854 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45856 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
45863 \begin_layout Description
45865 \begin_inset space ~
45868 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45869 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
45870 you can here specify the command to start the package.
45871 An example is the start command
45877 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
45879 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
45883 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
45898 selectlanguage{$$lang}
45903 \begin_layout Description
45905 \begin_inset space ~
45913 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
45914 command toggles the package on and off.
45917 \begin_layout Description
45919 \begin_inset space ~
45923 \begin_inset space ~
45926 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
45930 \begin_layout Description
45932 \begin_inset space ~
45936 \begin_inset space ~
45939 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
45943 \begin_layout Description
45945 \begin_inset space ~
45949 \begin_inset space ~
45952 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
45953 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
45954 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
45956 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
45963 \begin_layout Description
45965 \begin_inset space ~
45968 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
45970 When this option is not set, the
45973 \begin_inset space ~
45978 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45980 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
45983 \begin_inset space ~
45991 \begin_layout Description
45993 \begin_inset space ~
45999 \begin_inset space ~
46005 When it is not set, the
46008 \begin_inset space ~
46013 is set to the end of the document.
46016 \begin_layout Description
46018 \begin_inset space ~
46022 \begin_inset space ~
46025 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
46026 language will be underlined in blue.
46029 \begin_layout Description
46031 \begin_inset space ~
46035 \begin_inset space ~
46038 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
46039 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
46042 \begin_layout Description
46044 \begin_inset space ~
46047 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
46048 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
46049 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
46050 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
46053 \begin_layout Subsection
46057 \begin_layout Standard
46058 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
46059 \begin_inset space ~
46063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46065 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
46072 \begin_layout Section
46076 \begin_layout Subsection
46078 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46080 name "subsec:General-output"
46087 \begin_layout Description
46089 \begin_inset space ~
46092 search Commands that will be used for the menu
46094 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
46096 \begin_inset space ~
46102 For a detailed description see section
46104 Reverse DVI/PDF search
46109 \begin_inset space ~
46117 \begin_layout Description
46119 \begin_inset space ~
46122 Options Options for the program
46126 that is used for the export format
46131 \begin_inset space ~
46135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46137 reference "subsec:Export"
46142 Possible options are listed in the
46147 \begin_inset Newline newline
46151 \begin_inset Flex URL
46154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46156 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
46166 \begin_layout Description
46168 \begin_inset space ~
46172 \begin_inset space ~
46175 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
46178 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46179 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
46181 \begin_inset space ~
46187 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
46190 \begin_layout Description
46192 \begin_inset space ~
46196 \begin_inset Index idx
46199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46206 \begin_inset Index idx
46209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46210 Settings ! Date format
46215 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
46216 \begin_inset Newline newline
46220 \begin_inset Flex URL
46223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46225 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
46231 \begin_inset Newline newline
46234 For example the format
46235 \begin_inset Newline newline
46239 \begin_inset Newline newline
46242 prints the date as day/month/year.
46245 \begin_layout Description
46247 \begin_inset space ~
46251 \begin_inset space ~
46254 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
46255 is allowed to overwrite on export.
46258 \begin_layout Subsection
46264 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46266 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
46271 \begin_inset Index idx
46274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46275 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
46284 \begin_layout Description
46286 \begin_inset space ~
46294 \begin_inset space ~
46298 \begin_inset space ~
46301 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
46306 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
46327 are used for Cyrillic.
46328 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
46329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46341 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
46343 sets up in the background.
46344 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
46347 \begin_layout Description
46349 \begin_inset space ~
46353 \begin_inset space ~
46357 \begin_inset space ~
46361 \begin_inset space ~
46364 options They only have an effect when the program
46368 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
46371 \begin_layout Standard
46372 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
46373 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
46374 manuals of the applications.
46377 \begin_layout Description
46379 \begin_inset space ~
46382 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
46383 \begin_inset space ~
46387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46389 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
46396 \begin_layout Description
46398 \begin_inset space ~
46401 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
46402 \begin_inset space ~
46406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46408 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
46415 \begin_layout Description
46417 \begin_inset space ~
46420 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
46421 \begin_inset space ~
46425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46427 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
46434 \begin_layout Description
46440 \begin_inset space ~
46443 command Command for the program
46445 Check\SpecialChar TeX
46448 that is described in the section
46450 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
46455 Additional Features
46460 \begin_layout Standard
46461 There are additionally the following options:
46464 \begin_layout Description
46466 \begin_inset space ~
46470 \begin_inset space ~
46474 \begin_inset space ~
46478 \begin_inset space ~
46483 \begin_inset space ~
46486 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
46487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46504 to separate folders.
46505 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
46507 \begin_inset Index idx
46510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46517 \begin_inset Index idx
46520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46529 \begin_layout Description
46531 \begin_inset space ~
46535 \begin_inset space ~
46539 \begin_inset space ~
46543 \begin_inset space ~
46547 \begin_inset space ~
46551 \begin_inset space ~
46554 changes Removes all manually set
46560 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46561 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46563 \begin_inset space ~
46568 dialog when changing the document class.
46571 \begin_layout Section
46573 \begin_inset space ~
46577 \begin_inset Index idx
46580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46589 \begin_layout Subsection
46591 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46593 name "subsec:Converters"
46598 \begin_inset Index idx
46601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46610 \begin_layout Standard
46611 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
46612 from one format to another.
46613 You can modify converters or create new ones.
46614 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
46621 \begin_inset space ~
46626 field and press the
46631 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
46635 \begin_inset space ~
46640 drop-down list, modify the
46644 field and press the
46651 \begin_layout Standard
46654 Converter File Cache
46660 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
46662 Maximum Age (in days
46665 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
46666 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
46669 \begin_layout Standard
46670 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
46671 definition, is described in the section
46682 \begin_layout Subsection
46684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46686 name "sec:File-Formats"
46691 \begin_inset Index idx
46694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46701 \begin_inset Index idx
46704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46713 \begin_layout Standard
46714 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
46724 programs that should be used for certain formats.
46727 \begin_layout Standard
46728 You can also define the
46730 Default output format
46732 that is used when you use
46734 View, Update, View Master Document
46738 Update Master Document
46744 menu or the toolbar.
46747 \begin_layout Standard
46748 More about formats and their options is described in the section
46759 \begin_layout Standard
46760 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
46762 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
46763 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
46764 This is done by specifying a
46769 More about this is described in the section
46780 \begin_layout Chapter
46781 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
46783 \begin_inset Index idx
46786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46793 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46795 name "chap:Units-available-in"
46802 \begin_layout Standard
46804 \begin_inset space ~
46808 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46810 reference "tab:Units"
46814 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
46815 and used in this documentation.
46818 \begin_layout Standard
46819 \begin_inset Float table
46825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46826 \begin_inset Caption Standard
46828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46829 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46844 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
46850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46852 \begin_inset Tabular
46853 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
46854 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
46855 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
46856 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
46857 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
46859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46990 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46994 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47027 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47031 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47063 scaled point (65536
47064 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47068 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47101 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47105 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47138 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47142 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
47146 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47215 % of original image width
47220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47497 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47501 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47531 \begin_layout Chapter
47533 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47535 name "chap:Credits"
47542 \begin_layout Standard
47543 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
47544 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
47547 \begin_layout Itemize
47550 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
47553 \begin_layout Itemize
47559 \begin_layout Itemize
47565 \begin_layout Itemize
47571 \begin_layout Itemize
47577 \begin_layout Itemize
47583 \begin_layout Itemize
47589 \begin_layout Itemize
47595 \begin_layout Itemize
47598 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
47601 \begin_layout Itemize
47607 \begin_layout Itemize
47613 \begin_layout Itemize
47619 \begin_layout Itemize
47625 \begin_layout Itemize
47631 \begin_layout Itemize
47637 \begin_layout Itemize
47643 \begin_layout Itemize
47649 \begin_layout Itemize
47650 The \SpecialChar LyX
47652 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47661 \begin_layout Standard
47662 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47665 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
47672 \begin_layout Bibliography
47673 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47674 LatexCommand bibitem
47680 The \SpecialChar LyX
47682 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47685 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
47690 \begin_inset Newline newline
47694 \begin_inset Flex URL
47697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47699 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
47707 \begin_layout Bibliography
47708 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47709 LatexCommand bibitem
47710 key "latexcompanion"
47714 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
47716 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
47717 Companion Second Edition.
47720 Addison-Wesley, 2004
47723 \begin_layout Bibliography
47724 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47725 LatexCommand bibitem
47730 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
47733 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
47737 Addison-Wesley, 2003
47740 \begin_layout Bibliography
47741 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47742 LatexCommand bibitem
47750 : A Document Preparation System.
47753 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
47756 \begin_layout Bibliography
47757 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47758 LatexCommand bibitem
47767 The \SpecialChar TeX
47771 Addison-Wesley, 1984
47774 \begin_layout Bibliography
47775 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47776 LatexCommand bibitem
47781 The \SpecialChar TeX
47783 \begin_inset Newline newline
47787 \begin_inset Flex URL
47790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47792 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
47800 \begin_layout Bibliography
47801 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47802 LatexCommand bibitem
47807 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
47809 \begin_inset Newline newline
47813 \begin_inset Flex URL
47816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47818 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
47826 \begin_layout Bibliography
47827 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47828 LatexCommand bibitem
47834 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47836 name "Documentation"
47837 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
47843 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47847 \begin_inset Newline newline
47851 \begin_inset Flex URL
47854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47856 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
47864 \begin_layout Bibliography
47865 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47866 LatexCommand bibitem
47872 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47874 name "Documentation"
47875 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
47879 how to use the program
47881 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47885 \begin_inset Newline newline
47889 \begin_inset Flex URL
47892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47894 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
47902 \begin_layout Bibliography
47903 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47904 LatexCommand bibitem
47910 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47912 name "Documentation"
47913 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
47922 \begin_inset Newline newline
47926 \begin_inset Flex URL
47929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47931 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
47939 \begin_layout Bibliography
47940 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47941 LatexCommand bibitem
47942 key "makeindex-man"
47947 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47950 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
47959 \begin_inset Newline newline
47963 \begin_inset Flex URL
47966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47968 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
47976 \begin_layout Bibliography
47977 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47978 LatexCommand bibitem
47984 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47986 name "Documentation"
47987 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
47996 \begin_inset Newline newline
48000 \begin_inset Flex URL
48003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48005 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
48013 \begin_layout Bibliography
48014 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48015 LatexCommand bibitem
48021 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48023 name "Documentation"
48024 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
48028 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
48030 \begin_inset Newline newline
48034 \begin_inset Flex URL
48037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48039 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
48047 \begin_layout Bibliography
48048 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48049 LatexCommand bibitem
48055 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48057 name "Documentation"
48058 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
48062 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48068 \begin_inset Index idx
48071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48073 -packages ! caption
48079 \begin_inset Newline newline
48083 \begin_inset Flex URL
48086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48088 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
48096 \begin_layout Bibliography
48097 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48098 LatexCommand bibitem
48104 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48106 name "Documentation"
48107 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
48111 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48117 \begin_inset Index idx
48120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48122 -packages ! enumitem
48128 \begin_inset Newline newline
48132 \begin_inset Flex URL
48135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48137 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
48145 \begin_layout Bibliography
48146 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48147 LatexCommand bibitem
48153 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48155 name "Documentation"
48156 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
48160 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48166 \begin_inset Index idx
48169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48171 -packages ! fancyhdr
48177 \begin_inset Newline newline
48181 \begin_inset Flex URL
48184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48186 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
48194 \begin_layout Bibliography
48195 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48196 LatexCommand bibitem
48202 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48204 name "Documentation"
48205 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
48209 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48215 \begin_inset Index idx
48218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48220 -packages ! hyperref
48226 \begin_inset Newline newline
48230 \begin_inset Flex URL
48233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48235 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
48243 \begin_layout Bibliography
48244 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48245 LatexCommand bibitem
48251 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48253 name "Documentation"
48254 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
48258 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48264 \begin_inset Index idx
48267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48269 -packages ! nomencl
48275 \begin_inset Newline newline
48279 \begin_inset Flex URL
48282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48284 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
48292 \begin_layout Bibliography
48293 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48294 LatexCommand bibitem
48300 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48302 name "Documentation"
48303 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
48307 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48313 \begin_inset Index idx
48316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48318 -packages ! prettyref
48324 \begin_inset Newline newline
48328 \begin_inset Flex URL
48331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48333 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
48341 \begin_layout Bibliography
48342 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48343 LatexCommand bibitem
48349 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48351 name "Documentation"
48352 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
48356 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48362 \begin_inset Index idx
48365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48367 -packages ! refstyle
48373 \begin_inset Newline newline
48377 \begin_inset Flex URL
48380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48382 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
48390 \begin_layout Bibliography
48391 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48392 LatexCommand bibitem
48398 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48401 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
48405 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48407 \begin_inset Newline newline
48411 \begin_inset Flex URL
48414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48416 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
48424 \begin_layout Bibliography
48425 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48426 LatexCommand bibitem
48432 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48435 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
48439 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48441 \begin_inset Newline newline
48445 \begin_inset Flex URL
48448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48450 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
48458 \begin_layout Bibliography
48459 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48460 LatexCommand bibitem
48466 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48469 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
48473 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48474 for Cyrillic languages:
48475 \begin_inset Newline newline
48479 \begin_inset Flex URL
48482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48484 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
48492 \begin_layout Bibliography
48493 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48494 LatexCommand bibitem
48500 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48503 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
48507 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48509 \begin_inset Newline newline
48513 \begin_inset Flex URL
48516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48518 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
48526 \begin_layout Bibliography
48527 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48528 LatexCommand bibitem
48534 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48537 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
48541 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48543 \begin_inset Newline newline
48547 \begin_inset Flex URL
48550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48552 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
48560 \begin_layout Bibliography
48561 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48562 LatexCommand bibitem
48568 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48571 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
48575 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48577 \begin_inset Newline newline
48581 \begin_inset Flex URL
48584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48586 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
48594 \begin_layout Bibliography
48595 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48596 LatexCommand bibitem
48602 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48605 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
48609 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48611 \begin_inset Newline newline
48615 \begin_inset Flex URL
48618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48620 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
48628 \begin_layout Bibliography
48629 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48630 LatexCommand bibitem
48636 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48639 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
48643 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48645 \begin_inset Newline newline
48649 \begin_inset Flex URL
48652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48654 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
48662 \begin_layout Bibliography
48663 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48664 LatexCommand bibitem
48670 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48673 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
48677 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48679 \begin_inset Newline newline
48683 \begin_inset Flex URL
48686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48688 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
48696 \begin_layout Bibliography
48697 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48698 LatexCommand bibitem
48704 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48707 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
48711 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48713 \begin_inset Newline newline
48717 \begin_inset Flex URL
48720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48722 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
48730 \begin_layout Bibliography
48731 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48732 LatexCommand bibitem
48738 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48741 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
48745 about new features in
48751 \begin_inset Newline newline
48755 \begin_inset Flex URL
48758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48760 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
48768 \begin_layout Standard
48769 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
48776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48803 \begin_inset Note Note
48806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48813 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
48814 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
48815 bibliography is the second one:
48823 \begin_layout Standard
48824 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
48825 LatexCommand bibtex
48826 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
48827 options "biblio/alphadin"
48834 \begin_layout Standard
48835 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
48839 \begin_layout Standard
48840 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
48841 LatexCommand printnomenclature
48847 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
48848 LatexCommand printindex